|  | % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. | 
|  | \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\texinfoversion{2000-12-12.07} | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000 | 
|  | % Free Software Foundation, Inc. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or | 
|  | % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as | 
|  | % published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at | 
|  | % your option) any later version. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be | 
|  | % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty | 
|  | % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU | 
|  | % General Public License for more details. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License | 
|  | % along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING.  If not, write | 
|  | % to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, | 
|  | % Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program. | 
|  | % You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve | 
|  | % what you give them.   Help stamp out software-hoarding! | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug | 
|  | % reports; you can get the latest version from: | 
|  | %   ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo.tex | 
|  | %   (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html) | 
|  | %   ftp://texinfo.org/tex/texinfo.tex | 
|  | %   ftp://us.ctan.org/macros/texinfo/texinfo.tex | 
|  | %   (and all CTAN mirrors, finger ctan@us.ctan.org for a list). | 
|  | %   /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines. | 
|  | % The texinfo.tex in any given Texinfo distribution could well be out | 
|  | % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. | 
|  | % Texinfo has a small home page at http://texinfo.org/. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.  Please include including a | 
|  | % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the | 
|  | % problem.  Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the | 
|  | % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution.  For a simple | 
|  | % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: | 
|  | %   tex foo.texi | 
|  | %   texindex foo.?? | 
|  | %   tex foo.texi | 
|  | %   tex foo.texi | 
|  | %   dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever, to process the dvi file; this makes foo.ps. | 
|  | % The extra runs of TeX get the cross-reference information correct. | 
|  | % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more | 
|  | % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages.  You can get | 
|  | % the existing language-specific files from ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % If in a .fmt file, print the version number | 
|  | % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because | 
|  | % they might have appeared in the input file name. | 
|  | \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% | 
|  | \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine. | 
|  | \let\ptexb=\b | 
|  | \let\ptexbullet=\bullet | 
|  | \let\ptexc=\c | 
|  | \let\ptexcomma=\, | 
|  | \let\ptexdot=\. | 
|  | \let\ptexdots=\dots | 
|  | \let\ptexend=\end | 
|  | \let\ptexequiv=\equiv | 
|  | \let\ptexexclam=\! | 
|  | \let\ptexi=\i | 
|  | \let\ptexlbrace=\{ | 
|  | \let\ptexrbrace=\} | 
|  | \let\ptexstar=\* | 
|  | \let\ptext=\t | 
|  |  | 
|  | % We never want plain's outer \+ definition in Texinfo. | 
|  | % For @tex, we can use \tabalign. | 
|  | \let\+ = \relax | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{Basics,} | 
|  | \chardef\other=12 | 
|  |  | 
|  | % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it | 
|  | % starts a new line in the output. | 
|  | \newlinechar = `^^J | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Set up fixed words for English if not already set. | 
|  | \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined  \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordfile\undefined      \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordin\undefined        \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined     \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined      \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined  \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined   \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordof\undefined        \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordon\undefined        \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordpage\undefined      \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordsection\undefined   \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordSection\undefined   \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordsee\undefined       \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordSee\undefined       \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined  \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined       \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined   \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordDeftypevar\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypevar{Variable}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined   \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi | 
|  | \ifx\putwordDeftypefun\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypefun{Function}\fi | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Ignore a token. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\gobble#1{} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \hyphenation{ap-pen-dix} | 
|  | \hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers} | 
|  | \hyphenation{eshell} | 
|  | \hyphenation{white-space} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. | 
|  | \newdimen \bindingoffset | 
|  | \newdimen \normaloffset | 
|  | \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file | 
|  | % and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here, | 
|  | % since that produces some useless output on the terminal. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% | 
|  | \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined | 
|  | \def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2 | 
|  | \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1 | 
|  | \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1 | 
|  | \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \def\loggingall{\tracingcommands3 \tracingstats2 | 
|  | \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1 | 
|  | \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1 | 
|  | \tracingscantokens1 \tracingassigns1 \tracingifs1 | 
|  | \tracinggroups1 \tracingnesting2 | 
|  | \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  |  | 
|  | % For @cropmarks command. | 
|  | % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newif\ifcropmarks | 
|  | \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners. | 
|  | % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines | 
|  | \newdimen\cornerlong  \cornerlong=1pc | 
|  | \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt | 
|  | \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Main output routine. | 
|  | \chardef\PAGE = 255 | 
|  | \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newbox\headlinebox | 
|  | \newbox\footlinebox | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.  Note that \pagecontents | 
|  | % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself. | 
|  | \def\onepageout#1{% | 
|  | \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifodd\pageno  \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset | 
|  | \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in | 
|  | % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). | 
|  | \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}% | 
|  | \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | {% | 
|  | % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to | 
|  | % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends | 
|  | % before the \shipout runs. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files. | 
|  | \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output. | 
|  | \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if | 
|  | % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. | 
|  | \shipout\vbox{% | 
|  | % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. | 
|  | \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfmkdest{\the\pageno} \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup | 
|  | \hsize = \outerhsize | 
|  | \vskip-\topandbottommargin | 
|  | \vtop to0pt{% | 
|  | \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% | 
|  | \nointerlineskip | 
|  | \line{% | 
|  | \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% | 
|  | \hfill | 
|  | \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \vss}% | 
|  | \vskip\topandbottommargin | 
|  | \line\bgroup | 
|  | \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize. | 
|  | \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi | 
|  | \vbox\bgroup | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \unvbox\headlinebox | 
|  | \pagebody{#1}% | 
|  | \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt | 
|  | % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. | 
|  | % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.) | 
|  | % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. | 
|  | \vskip 2\baselineskip | 
|  | \unvbox\footlinebox | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifcropmarks | 
|  | \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup | 
|  | \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup | 
|  | \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill | 
|  | \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick | 
|  | \vbox to0pt{\vss | 
|  | \line{% | 
|  | \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% | 
|  | \hfill | 
|  | \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \nointerlineskip | 
|  | \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | }% end of \shipout\vbox | 
|  | }% end of group with \turnoffactive | 
|  | \advancepageno | 
|  | \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} | 
|  | {\catcode`\@ =11 | 
|  | \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi | 
|  | % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) | 
|  | \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present | 
|  | \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi | 
|  | \dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1 | 
|  | \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi | 
|  | \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Here are the rules for the cropmarks.  Note that they are | 
|  | % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize | 
|  | % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} | 
|  | \def\nstop{\vbox | 
|  | {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} | 
|  | \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} | 
|  | \def\nsbot{\vbox | 
|  | {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1.  The argument is the rest of | 
|  | % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a | 
|  | % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\parsearg#1{% | 
|  | \let\next = #1% | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \obeylines | 
|  | \futurelet\temp\parseargx | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or | 
|  | % the like), remove it and recurse.  Otherwise, we're done. | 
|  | \def\parseargx{% | 
|  | % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces. | 
|  | \ifx\obeyedspace\temp | 
|  | \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \expandafter\parseargline | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call). | 
|  | {\obeyspaces % | 
|  | \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | {\obeylines % | 
|  | \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% | 
|  | \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment. | 
|  | % Result of each macro is put in \toks0. | 
|  | \argremovec #1\c\relax % | 
|  | \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax % | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg. | 
|  | \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX | 
|  | % do that for us.  The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call | 
|  | % in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is | 
|  | % just to delimit the argument to the \c. | 
|  | \def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}} | 
|  | \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g., | 
|  | %    @end itemize  @c foo | 
|  | % will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the | 
|  | % `itemize'.  Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the | 
|  | % result to \toks0. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces | 
|  | % in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded. | 
|  | % Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands.  (If it ever | 
|  | % does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed | 
|  | % here.)  But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of | 
|  | % \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument | 
|  | % that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\removeactivespaces#1{% | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \ignoreactivespaces | 
|  | \edef\temp{#1}% | 
|  | \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}% | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Change the active space to expand to nothing. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \obeyspaces | 
|  | \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty} | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} | 
|  |  | 
|  | %% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away | 
|  | %% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup) | 
|  | \newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi} | 
|  | \def\ENVcheck{% | 
|  | \ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue} | 
|  | \endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @begin foo  is the same as @foo, for now. | 
|  | \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\beginxxx #1{% | 
|  | \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax | 
|  | {\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else | 
|  | \csname #1\endcsname\fi} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\end{\parsearg\endxxx} | 
|  | \def\endxxx #1{% | 
|  | \removeactivespaces{#1}% | 
|  | \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax | 
|  | \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax | 
|  | % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo. | 
|  | \errhelp = \EMsimple | 
|  | \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \unmatchedenderror\endthing | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started. | 
|  | \csname E\endthing\endcsname | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started.  Give an error. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\unmatchedenderror#1{% | 
|  | \errhelp = \EMsimple | 
|  | \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\defineunmatchedend#1{% | 
|  | \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Single-spacing is done by various environments (specifically, in | 
|  | % \nonfillstart and \quotations). | 
|  | \newskip\singlespaceskip \singlespaceskip = 12.5pt | 
|  | \def\singlespace{% | 
|  | % Why was this kern here?  It messes up equalizing space above and below | 
|  | % environments.  --karl, 6may93 | 
|  | %{\advance \baselineskip by -\singlespaceskip | 
|  | %\kern \baselineskip}% | 
|  | \setleading \singlespaceskip | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | %% Simple single-character @ commands | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @@ prints an @ | 
|  | % Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr). | 
|  | \def\@{{\tt\char64}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This is turned off because it was never documented | 
|  | % and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures. | 
|  | %% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and ' | 
|  | %% but suppressing ligatures. | 
|  | %\def\`{{`}} | 
|  | %\def\'{{'}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Used to generate quoted braces. | 
|  | \def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}} | 
|  | \def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}} | 
|  | \let\{=\mylbrace | 
|  | \let\}=\myrbrace | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | % Definitions to produce actual \{ & \} command in an index. | 
|  | \catcode`\{ = 12 \catcode`\} = 12 | 
|  | \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2 | 
|  | \catcode`\@ = 0 \catcode`\\ = 12 | 
|  | @gdef@lbracecmd[\{]% | 
|  | @gdef@rbracecmd[\}]% | 
|  | @endgroup | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent | 
|  | % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @v @H. | 
|  | \let\, = \c | 
|  | \let\dotaccent = \. | 
|  | \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} | 
|  | \let\tieaccent = \t | 
|  | \let\ubaraccent = \b | 
|  | \let\udotaccent = \d | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown | 
|  | % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (and lowercase versions) @ss. | 
|  | \def\questiondown{?`} | 
|  | \def\exclamdown{!`} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. | 
|  | \def\imacro{i} | 
|  | \def\jmacro{j} | 
|  | \def\dotless#1{% | 
|  | \def\temp{#1}% | 
|  | \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi | 
|  | \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j | 
|  | \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% | 
|  | \fi\fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space | 
|  | % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space | 
|  | % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and | 
|  | % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the | 
|  | % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. | 
|  | {\catcode`@ = 11 | 
|  | % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble | 
|  | % if the definition is written into an index file. | 
|  | \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M | 
|  | \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @: forces normal size whitespace following. | 
|  | \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @* forces a line break. | 
|  | \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @. is an end-of-sentence period. | 
|  | \def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @! is an end-of-sentence bang. | 
|  | \def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @? is an end-of-sentence query. | 
|  | \def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the | 
|  | % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would | 
|  | % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. | 
|  | \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing | 
|  | % it in a TeX vbox.  We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box | 
|  | % to keep its height that of a normal line.  According to the rules for | 
|  | % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is | 
|  | % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0).  If that height is large, | 
|  | % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and | 
|  | % the text is small, which looks bad. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\group{\begingroup | 
|  | \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else | 
|  | \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp | 
|  | \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large | 
|  | % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the | 
|  | % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it.  (See p.82 of | 
|  | % the TeXbook.)  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space | 
|  | % above.  But it's pretty close. | 
|  | \def\Egroup{% | 
|  | \egroup           % End the \vtop. | 
|  | \endgroup         % End the \group. | 
|  | }% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \vtop\bgroup | 
|  | % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in | 
|  | % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it. | 
|  | % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group | 
|  | % and the first line afterwards is too small.  But we can't put the | 
|  | % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself. | 
|  | % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line. | 
|  | \everypar = {\strut}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's | 
|  | % normal interline spacing. | 
|  | \offinterlineskip | 
|  | % | 
|  | % OK, but now we have to do something about blank | 
|  | % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally | 
|  | % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've | 
|  | % turned off the interline space.  Simplest is to make them be an | 
|  | % empty paragraph. | 
|  | \ifx\par\lisppar | 
|  | \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par. | 
|  | \obeylines | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as | 
|  | % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an | 
|  | % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after | 
|  | % the `@group' to put extra space in the output.  Since @group | 
|  | % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo | 
|  | % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. | 
|  | \comment | 
|  | } | 
|  | % | 
|  | % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help | 
|  | % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% | 
|  | group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% | 
|  | where each line of input produces a line of output.} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @need space-in-mils | 
|  | % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\need{\parsearg\needx} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Old definition--didn't work. | 
|  | %\def\needx #1{\par % | 
|  | %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally | 
|  | %% if the depth of the box does not fit. | 
|  | %{\baselineskip=0pt% | 
|  | %\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak | 
|  | %\prevdepth=-1000pt | 
|  | %}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\needx#1{% | 
|  | % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a | 
|  | % paragraph. | 
|  | \par | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. | 
|  | \dimen0 = #1\mil | 
|  | \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox | 
|  | \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox | 
|  | \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the | 
|  | % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. | 
|  | % And a page break here is fine. | 
|  | \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the | 
|  | % main vertical list is 10000 or more.  But in order to see if the | 
|  | % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider | 
|  | % page breaks.  On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the | 
|  | % page after the empty box.  So we use a penalty of 9999. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the | 
|  | % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in | 
|  | % sight.  (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which | 
|  | % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing | 
|  | % good page breaking, for example.)  However, I could not construct an | 
|  | % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real | 
|  | % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. | 
|  | \penalty9999 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. | 
|  | \kern -#1\mil | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. | 
|  | \nobreak | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @br   forces paragraph break | 
|  |  | 
|  | \let\br = \par | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font. | 
|  | % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter | 
|  | % font as three actual period characters. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\dots{% | 
|  | \leavevmode | 
|  | \hbox to 1.5em{% | 
|  | \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil | 
|  | .\hss.\hss.% | 
|  | \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil | 
|  | }% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\enddots{% | 
|  | \leavevmode | 
|  | \hbox to 2em{% | 
|  | \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil | 
|  | .\hss.\hss.\hss.% | 
|  | \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \spacefactor=3000 | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @page    forces the start of a new page | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @exdent text.... | 
|  | % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. | 
|  | % That's how much \exdent should take out. | 
|  | \newskip\exdentamount | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. | 
|  | \def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy} | 
|  | \def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. | 
|  | \def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy} | 
|  | \def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount | 
|  | \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current | 
|  | % paragraph.  For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion | 
|  | % class.  WHICH is `l' or `r'. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm | 
|  | \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% | 
|  | \nobreak | 
|  | \kern-\strutdepth | 
|  | \vtop to \strutdepth{% | 
|  | \baselineskip=\strutdepth | 
|  | \vss | 
|  | % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to | 
|  | % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. | 
|  | \ifx#1l% | 
|  | \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \null | 
|  | }% | 
|  | }} | 
|  | \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} | 
|  | \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} | 
|  | % | 
|  | % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} | 
|  | % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; | 
|  | % else use TEXT for both). | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} | 
|  | \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% | 
|  | \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt | 
|  | \def\lefttext{#1}%  have both texts | 
|  | \def\righttext{#2}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \def\lefttext{#1}%  have only one text | 
|  | \def\righttext{#1}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifodd\pageno | 
|  | \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \temp | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @include file    insert text of that file as input. | 
|  | % Allow normal characters that  we make active in the argument (a file name). | 
|  | \def\include{\begingroup | 
|  | \catcode`\\=12 | 
|  | \catcode`~=12 | 
|  | \catcode`^=12 | 
|  | \catcode`_=12 | 
|  | \catcode`|=12 | 
|  | \catcode`<=12 | 
|  | \catcode`>=12 | 
|  | \catcode`+=12 | 
|  | \parsearg\includezzz} | 
|  | % Restore active chars for included file. | 
|  | \def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup | 
|  | % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work. | 
|  | \def\thisfile{#1}% | 
|  | \input\thisfile | 
|  | \endgroup} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\thisfile{} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @center line   outputs that line, centered | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\center{\parsearg\centerzzz} | 
|  | \def\centerzzz #1{{\advance\hsize by -\leftskip | 
|  | \advance\hsize by -\rightskip | 
|  | \centerline{#1}}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx} | 
|  | \def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @comment ...line which is ignored... | 
|  | % @c is the same as @comment | 
|  | % @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other% | 
|  | \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% | 
|  | \commentxxx} | 
|  | {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \let\c=\comment | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @paragraphindent NCHARS | 
|  | % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. | 
|  | % We cannot implement @paragraphindent asis, though. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords | 
|  | \def\noneword{none} | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\paragraphindent{\parsearg\doparagraphindent} | 
|  | \def\doparagraphindent#1{% | 
|  | \def\temp{#1}% | 
|  | \ifx\temp\asisword | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \ifx\temp\noneword | 
|  | \defaultparindent = 0pt | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \defaultparindent = #1em | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \parindent = \defaultparindent | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @exampleindent NCHARS | 
|  | % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. | 
|  | % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but | 
|  | % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. | 
|  | \def\exampleindent{\parsearg\doexampleindent} | 
|  | \def\doexampleindent#1{% | 
|  | \def\temp{#1}% | 
|  | \ifx\temp\asisword | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \ifx\temp\noneword | 
|  | \lispnarrowing = 0pt | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \lispnarrowing = #1em | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\asis#1{#1} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @math means output in math mode. | 
|  | % We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because control | 
|  | % sequences like \math are expanded when the toc file is written.  Then, | 
|  | % we read the toc file back, the $'s will be normal characters (as they | 
|  | % should be, according to the definition of Texinfo).  So we must use a | 
|  | % control sequence to switch into and out of math mode. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % This isn't quite enough for @math to work properly in indices, but it | 
|  | % seems unlikely it will ever be needed there. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \let\implicitmath = $ | 
|  | \def\math#1{\implicitmath #1\implicitmath} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above. | 
|  | \def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath} | 
|  | \def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @refill is a no-op. | 
|  | \let\refill=\relax | 
|  |  | 
|  | % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to | 
|  | % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. | 
|  | % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename). | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. | 
|  | \let\novalidate = \linksfalse | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. | 
|  | % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. | 
|  | % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. | 
|  | \def\setfilename{% | 
|  | \iflinks | 
|  | \readauxfile | 
|  | \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case. | 
|  | \openindices | 
|  | \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. | 
|  | \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. | 
|  | % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. | 
|  | % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input. | 
|  | \openin 1 texinfo.cnf | 
|  | \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi | 
|  | \closein1 | 
|  | \temp | 
|  | % | 
|  | \comment % Ignore the actual filename. | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Called from \setfilename. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\openindices{% | 
|  | \newindex{cp}% | 
|  | \newcodeindex{fn}% | 
|  | \newcodeindex{vr}% | 
|  | \newcodeindex{tp}% | 
|  | \newcodeindex{ky}% | 
|  | \newcodeindex{pg}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @bye. | 
|  | \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{pdf,} | 
|  | % adobe `portable' document format | 
|  | \newcount\tempnum | 
|  | \newcount\lnkcount | 
|  | \newtoks\filename | 
|  | \newcount\filenamelength | 
|  | \newcount\pgn | 
|  | \newtoks\toksA | 
|  | \newtoks\toksB | 
|  | \newtoks\toksC | 
|  | \newtoks\toksD | 
|  | \newbox\boxA | 
|  | \newcount\countA | 
|  | \newif\ifpdf | 
|  | \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest | 
|  |  | 
|  | \ifx\pdfoutput\undefined | 
|  | \pdffalse | 
|  | \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble | 
|  | \let\pdfurl = \gobble | 
|  | \let\endlink = \relax | 
|  | \let\linkcolor = \relax | 
|  | \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \pdftrue | 
|  | \pdfoutput = 1 | 
|  | \input pdfcolor | 
|  | \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% | 
|  | \def\imagewidth{#2}% | 
|  | \def\imageheight{#3}% | 
|  | \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 | 
|  | \pdfimage | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \pdfximage | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi | 
|  | \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi | 
|  | {#1.pdf}% | 
|  | \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else | 
|  | \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage | 
|  | \fi} | 
|  | \def\pdfmkdest#1{\pdfdest name{#1@} xyz} | 
|  | \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1@} | 
|  | \let\linkcolor = \Blue  % was Cyan, but that seems light? | 
|  | \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink} | 
|  | % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines | 
|  | % come from Petr Olsak | 
|  | \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% | 
|  | \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} | 
|  | \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax | 
|  | \advance\tempnum by1 | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} | 
|  | \def\pdfmakeoutlines{{% | 
|  | \openin 1 \jobname.toc | 
|  | \ifeof 1\else\bgroup | 
|  | \closein 1 | 
|  | \indexnofonts | 
|  | \def\tt{} | 
|  | \let\_ = \normalunderscore | 
|  | % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks | 
|  | \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace | 
|  | \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{} | 
|  | \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{} | 
|  | \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{chap##2}} | 
|  | \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{} | 
|  | \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}} | 
|  | \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{} | 
|  | \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}} | 
|  | \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{} | 
|  | \input \jobname.toc | 
|  | \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{% | 
|  | \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}count-\expnumber{chap##2}{##1}} | 
|  | \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{% | 
|  | \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}} | 
|  | \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{% | 
|  | \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}count-\expnumber{sec##2.##3}{##1}} | 
|  | \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{% | 
|  | \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}} | 
|  | \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{% | 
|  | \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}count-\expnumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}{##1}} | 
|  | \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{% | 
|  | \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}} | 
|  | \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{% | 
|  | \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##6}}{##1}} | 
|  | \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{% | 
|  | \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}} | 
|  | \input \jobname.toc | 
|  | \egroup\fi | 
|  | }} | 
|  | \def\makelinks #1,{% | 
|  | \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}% | 
|  | \ifx\params\E | 
|  | \let\nextmakelinks=\relax | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks | 
|  | \ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi | 
|  | \picknum{#1}% | 
|  | \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} | 
|  | goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}% | 
|  | \linkcolor #1% | 
|  | \advance\lnkcount by 1% | 
|  | \endlink | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \nextmakelinks | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1} | 
|  | \def\pn#1{% | 
|  | \def\p{#1}% | 
|  | \ifx\p\lbrace | 
|  | \let\nextpn=\ppn | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \let\nextpn=\ppnn | 
|  | \def\first{#1} | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \nextpn | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble} | 
|  | \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first} | 
|  | \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,} | 
|  | \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} | 
|  | \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% | 
|  | \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax | 
|  | \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces | 
|  | \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% | 
|  | \advance\filenamelength by 1 | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \nextsp} | 
|  | \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax} | 
|  | \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 | 
|  | \let \startlink \pdfannotlink | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \let \startlink \pdfstartlink | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \def\pdfurl#1{% | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}% | 
|  | \leavevmode\Red | 
|  | \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% | 
|  | user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% | 
|  | % #1 | 
|  | \endgroup} | 
|  | \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} | 
|  | \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} | 
|  | \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} | 
|  | \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} | 
|  | \def\maketoks{% | 
|  | \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS| | 
|  | \ifx\first0\adn0 | 
|  | \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 | 
|  | \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 | 
|  | \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi | 
|  | \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else | 
|  | \let\next=\maketoks | 
|  | \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} | 
|  | \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi | 
|  | \next} | 
|  | \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% | 
|  | {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} | 
|  | \def\pdflink#1{% | 
|  | \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\mkpgn{#1}} | 
|  | \linkcolor #1\endlink} | 
|  | \def\mkpgn#1{#1@} | 
|  | \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} | 
|  | \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{fonts,} | 
|  | % Font-change commands. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. | 
|  | % So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc. | 
|  | \newfam\sffam | 
|  | \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf} | 
|  | \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % We don't need math for this one. | 
|  | \def\ttsl{\tenttsl} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Use Computer Modern fonts at \magstephalf (11pt). | 
|  | \newcount\mainmagstep | 
|  | \mainmagstep=\magstephalf | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the | 
|  | % specified font prefix (normally `cm'). | 
|  | % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor | 
|  | \def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Use cm as the default font prefix. | 
|  | % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix | 
|  | % before you read in texinfo.tex. | 
|  | \ifx\fontprefix\undefined | 
|  | \def\fontprefix{cm} | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. | 
|  | \def\rmshape{r} | 
|  | \def\rmbshape{bx}               %where the normal face is bold | 
|  | \def\bfshape{b} | 
|  | \def\bxshape{bx} | 
|  | \def\ttshape{tt} | 
|  | \def\ttbshape{tt} | 
|  | \def\ttslshape{sltt} | 
|  | \def\itshape{ti} | 
|  | \def\itbshape{bxti} | 
|  | \def\slshape{sl} | 
|  | \def\slbshape{bxsl} | 
|  | \def\sfshape{ss} | 
|  | \def\sfbshape{ss} | 
|  | \def\scshape{csc} | 
|  | \def\scbshape{csc} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \ifx\bigger\relax | 
|  | \let\mainmagstep=\magstep1 | 
|  | \setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000} | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | 
|  | \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10. | 
|  | % cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10 | 
|  | % looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10. | 
|  | \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | 
|  | \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | 
|  | \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | 
|  | \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | 
|  | \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | 
|  | \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | 
|  | \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep | 
|  | \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep | 
|  |  | 
|  | % A few fonts for @defun, etc. | 
|  | \setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314 | 
|  | \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1} | 
|  | \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). | 
|  | \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900} | 
|  | \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900} | 
|  | \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900} | 
|  | \font\smalli=cmmi9 | 
|  | \font\smallsy=cmsy9 | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Fonts for title page: | 
|  | \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3} | 
|  | \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4} | 
|  | \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4} | 
|  | \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3} | 
|  | \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4} | 
|  | \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1} | 
|  | \let\titlebf=\titlerm | 
|  | \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4} | 
|  | \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 | 
|  | \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 | 
|  | \def\authorrm{\secrm} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). | 
|  | \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2} | 
|  | \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3} | 
|  | \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3} | 
|  | \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2} | 
|  | \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3} | 
|  | \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000} | 
|  | \let\chapbf=\chaprm | 
|  | \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3} | 
|  | \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 | 
|  | \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Section fonts (14.4pt). | 
|  | \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1} | 
|  | \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2} | 
|  | \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2} | 
|  | \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1} | 
|  | \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2} | 
|  | \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1} | 
|  | \let\secbf\secrm | 
|  | \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2} | 
|  | \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 | 
|  | \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \setfont\ssecrm\bxshape{10}{\magstep1}    % This size an font looked bad. | 
|  | % \setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{\magstep1}    % The letters were too crowded. | 
|  | % \setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1} | 
|  | % \setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1} | 
|  | % \setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{\magstep1} | 
|  |  | 
|  | %\setfont\ssecrm\bfshape{10}{1315}      % Note the use of cmb rather than cmbx. | 
|  | %\setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{1315}      % Also, the size is a little larger than | 
|  | %\setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{1315}      % being scaled magstep1. | 
|  | %\setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{1315} | 
|  | %\setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{1315} | 
|  |  | 
|  | %\let\ssecbf=\ssecrm | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Subsection fonts (13.15pt). | 
|  | \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf} | 
|  | \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315} | 
|  | \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315} | 
|  | \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf} | 
|  | \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315} | 
|  | \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf} | 
|  | \let\ssecbf\ssecrm | 
|  | \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1} | 
|  | \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf | 
|  | \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 | 
|  | % The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5, | 
|  | % but that is not a standard magnification. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, | 
|  | % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since | 
|  | % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts, we | 
|  | % don't bother to reset \scriptfont and \scriptscriptfont (which would | 
|  | % also require loading a lot more fonts). | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\resetmathfonts{% | 
|  | \textfont0 = \tenrm \textfont1 = \teni \textfont2 = \tensy | 
|  | \textfont\itfam = \tenit \textfont\slfam = \tensl \textfont\bffam = \tenbf | 
|  | \textfont\ttfam = \tentt \textfont\sffam = \tensf | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead | 
|  | % of just \STYLE.  We do this so that font changes will continue to work | 
|  | % in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most | 
|  | % cases, not the current font.  Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam | 
|  | % \tenbf}, for example.  By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to | 
|  | % redefine \bf itself. | 
|  | \def\textfonts{% | 
|  | \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl | 
|  | \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc | 
|  | \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl | 
|  | \resetmathfonts} | 
|  | \def\titlefonts{% | 
|  | \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl | 
|  | \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc | 
|  | \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy | 
|  | \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl | 
|  | \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}} | 
|  | \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}} | 
|  | \def\chapfonts{% | 
|  | \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl | 
|  | \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc | 
|  | \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl | 
|  | \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}} | 
|  | \def\secfonts{% | 
|  | \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl | 
|  | \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc | 
|  | \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl | 
|  | \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}} | 
|  | \def\subsecfonts{% | 
|  | \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl | 
|  | \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc | 
|  | \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl | 
|  | \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} | 
|  | \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf? | 
|  | \def\smallfonts{% | 
|  | \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl | 
|  | \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc | 
|  | \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy | 
|  | \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl | 
|  | \resetmathfonts \setleading{11pt}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \textfonts | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts. | 
|  | \def\angleleft{$\langle$} | 
|  | \def\angleright{$\rangle$} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks | 
|  | \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Fonts for short table of contents. | 
|  | \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000} | 
|  | \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000} | 
|  |  | 
|  | %% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans | 
|  | %% serif) and @ii for TeX italic | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction | 
|  | % unless the following character is such as not to need one. | 
|  | \def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi} | 
|  | \def\smartslanted#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | 
|  | \def\smartitalic#1{{\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \let\i=\smartitalic | 
|  | \let\var=\smartslanted | 
|  | \let\dfn=\smartslanted | 
|  | \let\emph=\smartitalic | 
|  | \let\cite=\smartslanted | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\b#1{{\bf #1}} | 
|  | \let\strong=\b | 
|  |  | 
|  | % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at | 
|  | % the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the | 
|  | % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} | 
|  | \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\t#1{% | 
|  | {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}% | 
|  | \null | 
|  | } | 
|  | \let\ttfont=\t | 
|  | \def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null} | 
|  | \setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000} | 
|  | \font\keysy=cmsy9 | 
|  | \def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% | 
|  | \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% | 
|  | \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt | 
|  | \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% | 
|  | \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% | 
|  | \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} | 
|  | % The old definition, with no lozenge: | 
|  | %\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null} | 
|  | \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @file, @option are the same as @samp. | 
|  | \let\file=\samp | 
|  | \let\option=\samp | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @code is a modification of @t, | 
|  | % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text. | 
|  | \def\tclose#1{% | 
|  | {% | 
|  | % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. | 
|  | \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Switch to typewriter. | 
|  | \tt | 
|  | % | 
|  | % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. | 
|  | \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Turn off hyphenation. | 
|  | \nohyphenation | 
|  | % | 
|  | \rawbackslash | 
|  | \frenchspacing | 
|  | #1% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \null | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code. | 
|  | % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes | 
|  | % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control | 
|  | % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. | 
|  | % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) | 
|  | % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. | 
|  | %  -- rms. | 
|  | { | 
|  | \catcode`\-=\active | 
|  | \catcode`\_=\active | 
|  | % | 
|  | \global\def\code{\begingroup | 
|  | \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash | 
|  | \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder | 
|  | \codex | 
|  | } | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index, | 
|  | % just treat them as a normal -. | 
|  | \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash} | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\realdash{-} | 
|  | \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} | 
|  | \def\codeunder{\ifusingtt{\normalunderscore\discretionary{}{}{}}{\_}} | 
|  | \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} | 
|  |  | 
|  | %\let\exp=\tclose  %Was temporary | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, | 
|  | % then @kbd has no effect. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), | 
|  | %   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), | 
|  | %   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). | 
|  | \def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx} | 
|  | \def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{% | 
|  | \def\arg{#1}% | 
|  | \ifx\arg\worddistinct | 
|  | \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% | 
|  | \else\ifx\arg\wordexample | 
|  | \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% | 
|  | \else\ifx\arg\wordcode | 
|  | \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% | 
|  | \fi\fi\fi | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\worddistinct{distinct} | 
|  | \def\wordexample{example} | 
|  | \def\wordcode{code} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Default is kbdinputdistinct.  (Too much of a hassle to call the macro, | 
|  | % the catcodes are wrong for parsearg to work.) | 
|  | \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\xkey{\key} | 
|  | \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% | 
|  | \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% | 
|  | \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi | 
|  | \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code. | 
|  | \let\url=\code | 
|  | \let\env=\code | 
|  | \let\command=\code | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated) | 
|  | % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third | 
|  | % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url | 
|  | % itself.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.  Perhaps eventually put in | 
|  | % a hypertex \special here. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish} | 
|  | \def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup | 
|  | \unsepspaces | 
|  | \pdfurl{#1}% | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% | 
|  | \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt | 
|  | \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% | 
|  | \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt | 
|  | \ifpdf | 
|  | \unhbox0             % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \code{#1}% only url given, so show it | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \endlink | 
|  | \endgroup} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. | 
|  | % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. | 
|  | % | 
|  | %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} | 
|  | \ifpdf | 
|  | \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} | 
|  | \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup | 
|  | \unsepspaces | 
|  | \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% | 
|  | \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi | 
|  | \endlink | 
|  | \endgroup} | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \let\email=\uref | 
|  | \fi | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the | 
|  | % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and | 
|  | % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have | 
|  | % this property, we can check that font parameter. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the | 
|  | % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'', | 
|  | % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for | 
|  | % Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96. | 
|  | %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. | 
|  | \def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font | 
|  | \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font | 
|  | \def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps. | 
|  | \def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @pounds{} is a sterling sign. | 
|  | \def\pounds{{\it\$}} | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{page headings,} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in | 
|  | \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc | 
|  |  | 
|  | % First the title page.  Must do @settitle before @titlepage. | 
|  | \newif\ifseenauthor | 
|  | \newif\iffinishedtitlepage | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the | 
|  | % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage | 
|  | \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue | 
|  | \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage | 
|  | \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz} | 
|  | \def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% | 
|  | \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts | 
|  | \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm | 
|  | \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Leave some space at the very top of the page. | 
|  | \vglue\titlepagetopglue | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Now you can print the title using @title. | 
|  | \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}% | 
|  | \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1} | 
|  | % print a rule at the page bottom also. | 
|  | \finishedtitlepagefalse | 
|  | \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}% | 
|  | % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. | 
|  | \finishedtitlepagetrue | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Now you can put text using @subtitle. | 
|  | \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}% | 
|  | \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % @author should come last, but may come many times. | 
|  | \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}% | 
|  | \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi | 
|  | {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space | 
|  | % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second. | 
|  | \let\oldpage = \page | 
|  | \def\page{% | 
|  | \iffinishedtitlepage\else | 
|  | \finishtitlepage | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \oldpage | 
|  | \let\page = \oldpage | 
|  | \hbox{}}% | 
|  | %   \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}} | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\Etitlepage{% | 
|  | \iffinishedtitlepage\else | 
|  | \finishtitlepage | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, | 
|  | % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. | 
|  | % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page | 
|  | % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. | 
|  | \oldpage | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If they want short, they certainly want long too. | 
|  | \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage | 
|  | \shortcontents | 
|  | \contents | 
|  | \global\let\shortcontents = \relax | 
|  | \global\let\contents = \relax | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage | 
|  | \contents | 
|  | \global\let\contents = \relax | 
|  | \global\let\shortcontents = \relax | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifpdf \pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \HEADINGSon | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\finishtitlepage{% | 
|  | \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize | 
|  | \vskip\titlepagebottomglue | 
|  | \finishedtitlepagetrue | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | %%% Set up page headings and footings. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \let\thispage=\folio | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newtoks\evenheadline    % headline on even pages | 
|  | \newtoks\oddheadline     % headline on odd pages | 
|  | \newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages | 
|  | \newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Now make Tex use those variables | 
|  | \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline | 
|  | \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} | 
|  | \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline | 
|  | \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} | 
|  | \let\HEADINGShook=\relax | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Commands to set those variables. | 
|  | % For example, this is what  @headings on  does | 
|  | % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter | 
|  | % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle | 
|  | % @evenfooting @thisfile|| | 
|  | % @oddfooting ||@thisfile | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} | 
|  | \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} | 
|  | \def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} | 
|  | \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} | 
|  | \def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx} | 
|  |  | 
|  | {\catcode`\@=0 % | 
|  |  | 
|  | \gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} | 
|  | \gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% | 
|  | \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} | 
|  | \gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% | 
|  | \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% | 
|  |  | 
|  | \gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} | 
|  | \gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% | 
|  | \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} | 
|  | \gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% | 
|  | \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume | 
|  | % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. | 
|  | \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip | 
|  | \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} | 
|  | % | 
|  | }% unbind the catcode of @. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing. | 
|  | % @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing. | 
|  | % @headings off         turns them off. | 
|  | % @headings on          same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. | 
|  | % @headings after       turns on double-sided headings after this page. | 
|  | % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. | 
|  | % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. | 
|  | % By default, they are off at the start of a document, | 
|  | % and turned `on' after @end titlepage. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\HEADINGSoff{ | 
|  | \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | 
|  | \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}} | 
|  | \HEADINGSoff | 
|  | % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. | 
|  | % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, | 
|  | % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document | 
|  | % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top | 
|  | % edge of all pages. | 
|  | \def\HEADINGSdouble{ | 
|  | \global\pageno=1 | 
|  | \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | 
|  | \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | 
|  | \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} | 
|  | \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | 
|  | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage | 
|  | } | 
|  | \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | 
|  |  | 
|  | % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, | 
|  | % page number on top right. | 
|  | \def\HEADINGSsingle{ | 
|  | \global\pageno=1 | 
|  | \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | 
|  | \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | 
|  | \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | 
|  | \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | 
|  | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} | 
|  | \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter | 
|  | \def\HEADINGSdoublex{% | 
|  | \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | 
|  | \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | 
|  | \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} | 
|  | \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | 
|  | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} | 
|  | \def\HEADINGSsinglex{% | 
|  | \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | 
|  | \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | 
|  | \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | 
|  | \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | 
|  | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Subroutines used in generating headings | 
|  | % This produces Day Month Year style of output. | 
|  | % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set | 
|  | % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). | 
|  | \ifx\today\undefined | 
|  | \def\today{% | 
|  | \number\day\space | 
|  | \ifcase\month | 
|  | \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr | 
|  | \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug | 
|  | \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \space\number\year} | 
|  | \fi | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings. | 
|  | % It generates no output of its own. | 
|  | \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} | 
|  | \def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz} | 
|  | \def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}} | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{tables,} | 
|  | % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x). | 
|  |  | 
|  | % default indentation of table text | 
|  | \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in | 
|  | % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text | 
|  | \newdimen\itemindent  \itemindent=.3in | 
|  | % margin between end of table item and start of table text. | 
|  | \newdimen\itemmargin  \itemmargin=.1in | 
|  |  | 
|  | % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin | 
|  | \newdimen\itemmax | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with | 
|  | % these defs. | 
|  | % They also define \itemindex | 
|  | % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} | 
|  | \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz} | 
|  | \def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz} | 
|  | \def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}% | 
|  | \itemzzz {#1}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}% | 
|  | \itemzzz {#1}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % | 
|  | \advance\hsize by -\rightskip | 
|  | \advance\hsize by -\tableindent | 
|  | \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}% | 
|  | \itemindex{#1}% | 
|  | \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line | 
|  | % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that | 
|  | % line.  We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next | 
|  | % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the | 
|  | % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. | 
|  | \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, | 
|  | % but leave it ragged-right. | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent | 
|  | \advance\hsize by\tableindent | 
|  | \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil | 
|  | \leavevmode\unhbox0\par | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | % | 
|  | % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the | 
|  | % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. | 
|  | \nobreak \vskip-\parskip | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  Unfortunately | 
|  | % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following | 
|  | % \baselineskip glue. | 
|  | \nobreak | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % The item text fits into the space.  Start a paragraph, so that the | 
|  | % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. | 
|  | \noindent | 
|  | % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in | 
|  | % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and | 
|  | % eventually be printed. | 
|  | \nobreak\kern-\tableindent | 
|  | \dimen0 = \itemmax  \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 | 
|  | \unhbox0 | 
|  | \nobreak\kern\dimen0 | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}} | 
|  | \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}} | 
|  | \def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}} | 
|  | \def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}} | 
|  | \def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}} | 
|  | \def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work. | 
|  | \def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @table, @ftable, @vtable. | 
|  | \def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex} | 
|  | {\obeylines\obeyspaces% | 
|  | \gdef\tablex #1^^M{% | 
|  | \tabley\dontindex#1        \endtabley}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex} | 
|  | {\obeylines\obeyspaces% | 
|  | \gdef\ftablex #1^^M{% | 
|  | \tabley\fnitemindex#1        \endtabley | 
|  | \def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% | 
|  | \let\Etable=\relax}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex} | 
|  | {\obeylines\obeyspaces% | 
|  | \gdef\vtablex #1^^M{% | 
|  | \tabley\vritemindex#1        \endtabley | 
|  | \def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% | 
|  | \let\Etable=\relax}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\dontindex #1{} | 
|  | \def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}% | 
|  | \def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}% | 
|  |  | 
|  | {\obeyspaces % | 
|  | \gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup% | 
|  | \tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{% | 
|  | \aboveenvbreak % | 
|  | \begingroup % | 
|  | \def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge. | 
|  | \let\itemindex=#1% | 
|  | \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi % | 
|  | \ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi % | 
|  | \ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi % | 
|  | \def\itemfont{#2}% | 
|  | \itemmax=\tableindent % | 
|  | \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin % | 
|  | \advance \leftskip by \tableindent % | 
|  | \exdentamount=\tableindent | 
|  | \parindent = 0pt | 
|  | \parskip = \smallskipamount | 
|  | \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi% | 
|  | \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% | 
|  | \let\item = \internalBitem % | 
|  | \let\itemx = \internalBitemx % | 
|  | \let\kitem = \internalBkitem % | 
|  | \let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx % | 
|  | \let\xitem = \internalBxitem % | 
|  | \let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx % | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newcount \itemno | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\itemizezzz #1{% | 
|  | \begingroup % ended by the @end itemize | 
|  | \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize} | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\itemizey #1#2{% | 
|  | \aboveenvbreak % | 
|  | \itemmax=\itemindent % | 
|  | \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin % | 
|  | \advance \leftskip by \itemindent % | 
|  | \exdentamount=\itemindent | 
|  | \parindent = 0pt % | 
|  | \parskip = \smallskipamount % | 
|  | \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi% | 
|  | \def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% | 
|  | \def\itemcontents{#1}% | 
|  | \let\item=\itemizeitem} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. | 
|  | % These are `.?!:;,' | 
|  | \def\frenchspacing{\sfcode46=1000 \sfcode63=1000 \sfcode33=1000 | 
|  | \sfcode58=1000 \sfcode59=1000 \sfcode44=1000 } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in | 
|  | % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, | 
|  | % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No | 
|  | % argument is the same as `1'. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz} | 
|  | \def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey} | 
|  | \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% | 
|  | \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. | 
|  | \def\thearg{#1}% | 
|  | \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Detect if the argument is a single token.  If so, it might be a | 
|  | % letter.  Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. | 
|  | % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. | 
|  | % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at | 
|  | % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) | 
|  | \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark | 
|  | \ifx\rest\empty | 
|  | % Only one token in the argument.  It could still be anything. | 
|  | % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. | 
|  | % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and | 
|  | %   not equal to itself. | 
|  | % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from | 
|  | % continuing to look for a <number>. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax | 
|  | \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % It's a letter. | 
|  | \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax | 
|  | \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % Multiple tokens in the argument.  We hope it's a number. | 
|  | \numericenumerate | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % An @enumerate whose labels are integers.  The starting integer is | 
|  | % given in \thearg. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\numericenumerate{% | 
|  | \itemno = \thearg | 
|  | \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. | 
|  | \def\lowercaseenumerate{% | 
|  | \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg | 
|  | \startenumeration{% | 
|  | % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. | 
|  | \ifnum\itemno=0 | 
|  | \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger | 
|  | alphabet}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \char\lccode\itemno | 
|  | }% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. | 
|  | \def\uppercaseenumerate{% | 
|  | \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg | 
|  | \startenumeration{% | 
|  | % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. | 
|  | \ifnum\itemno=0 | 
|  | \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger | 
|  | alphabet} | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \char\uccode\itemno | 
|  | }% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the | 
|  | % common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in | 
|  | % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\startenumeration#1{% | 
|  | \advance\itemno by -1 | 
|  | \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg | 
|  | % to @enumerate. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} | 
|  | \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} | 
|  | \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} | 
|  | \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Definition of @item while inside @itemize. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\itemizeitem{% | 
|  | \advance\itemno by 1 | 
|  | {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% | 
|  | \ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi | 
|  | {\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt | 
|  | \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}% | 
|  | \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% | 
|  | \flushcr} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @multitable macros | 
|  | % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. | 
|  | % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble.  Width | 
|  | % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, | 
|  | % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % To make preamble: | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: | 
|  | %   @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 | 
|  | %   @item ... | 
|  | % | 
|  | %   Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total | 
|  | %   current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many | 
|  | %   columns as desired. | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Or use a template: | 
|  | %   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} | 
|  | %   @item ... | 
|  | %   using the widest term desired in each column. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in | 
|  | % the preamble, break the line within one argument and it | 
|  | % will parse correctly, i.e., | 
|  | % | 
|  | %     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 | 
|  | %      template} | 
|  | % Not: | 
|  | %     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} | 
|  | %      {Column 3 template} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column | 
|  | % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's | 
|  | % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, | 
|  | % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their | 
|  | % own lines, but it will not hurt if they are. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Sample multitable: | 
|  |  | 
|  | %   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} | 
|  | %   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col | 
|  | %   @item | 
|  | %   first col stuff | 
|  | %   @tab | 
|  | %   second col stuff | 
|  | %   @tab | 
|  | %   third col | 
|  | %   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff | 
|  | %   @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. | 
|  | % | 
|  | %         They will wrap at the width determined by the template. | 
|  | %   @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. | 
|  | %   @end multitable | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Default dimensions may be reset by user. | 
|  | % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. | 
|  | % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. | 
|  | % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. | 
|  | % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline | 
|  | %                                                            to baseline. | 
|  | %   0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newskip\multitableparskip | 
|  | \newskip\multitableparindent | 
|  | \newdimen\multitablecolspace | 
|  | \newskip\multitablelinespace | 
|  | \multitableparskip=0pt | 
|  | \multitableparindent=6pt | 
|  | \multitablecolspace=12pt | 
|  | \multitablelinespace=0pt | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Macros used to set up halign preamble: | 
|  | % | 
|  | \let\endsetuptable\relax | 
|  | \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} | 
|  | \let\columnfractions\relax | 
|  | \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} | 
|  | \newif\ifsetpercent | 
|  |  | 
|  | % #1 is the part of the @columnfraction before the decimal point, which | 
|  | % is presumably either 0 or the empty string (but we don't check, we | 
|  | % just throw it away).  #2 is the decimal part, which we use as the | 
|  | % percent of \hsize for this column. | 
|  | \def\pickupwholefraction#1.#2 {% | 
|  | \global\advance\colcount by 1 | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#2\hsize}% | 
|  | \setuptable | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newcount\colcount | 
|  | \def\setuptable#1{% | 
|  | \def\firstarg{#1}% | 
|  | \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable | 
|  | \let\go = \relax | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions | 
|  | \global\setpercenttrue | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \ifsetpercent | 
|  | \let\go\pickupwholefraction | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \global\advance\colcount by 1 | 
|  | \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip }% Add a normal word space as a separator; | 
|  | % typically that is always in the input, anyway. | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction | 
|  | % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so | 
|  | % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. | 
|  | \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \let\go = \setuptable | 
|  | \fi% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \go | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This used to have \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template line is | 
|  | % not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just & until we | 
|  | % encounter the problem it was intended to solve again. | 
|  | % --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. | 
|  | \def\tab{&} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable} | 
|  | \def\dotable#1{\bgroup | 
|  | \vskip\parskip | 
|  | \let\item\crcr | 
|  | \tolerance=9500 | 
|  | \hbadness=9500 | 
|  | \setmultitablespacing | 
|  | \parskip=\multitableparskip | 
|  | \parindent=\multitableparindent | 
|  | \overfullrule=0pt | 
|  | \global\colcount=0 | 
|  | \def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\cr\egroup\egroup}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: | 
|  | \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable | 
|  | % | 
|  | % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of | 
|  | % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one. | 
|  | % The table preamble | 
|  | % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width. | 
|  | \everycr{\noalign{% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. | 
|  | % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table | 
|  | % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the problem | 
|  | % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl. | 
|  | \global\colcount=0\relax}}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will | 
|  | % be used as many times as user calls for columns. | 
|  | % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and | 
|  | % continue for many paragraphs if desired. | 
|  | \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax | 
|  | \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname | 
|  | % | 
|  | % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other | 
|  | % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after | 
|  | % the first one. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace | 
|  | % to the width of each template entry. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will | 
|  | % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip | 
|  | % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at | 
|  | % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. | 
|  | \rightskip=0pt | 
|  | \ifnum\colcount=1 | 
|  | % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. | 
|  | \advance\hsize by\leftskip | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \ifsetpercent \else | 
|  | % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize | 
|  | % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. | 
|  | \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: | 
|  | \leftskip=\multitablecolspace | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious | 
|  | % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the | 
|  | % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. | 
|  | % For example: | 
|  | % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 | 
|  | % @item @code{#} | 
|  | % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. | 
|  | % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking | 
|  | % characters. | 
|  | \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace. | 
|  | % If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on | 
|  | % current baselineskip. | 
|  | \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt | 
|  | \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip | 
|  | \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 | 
|  | %% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders, | 
|  | %% to keep lines equally spaced | 
|  | \let\multistrut = \strut | 
|  | \else | 
|  | %% FIXME: what is \box0 supposed to be? | 
|  | \gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0 | 
|  | width0pt\relax} \fi | 
|  | %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of | 
|  | %% table. If not, do nothing. | 
|  | %%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. | 
|  | \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace | 
|  | \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace | 
|  | \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller | 
|  | %% than skip between lines in the table. | 
|  | \fi% | 
|  | \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt | 
|  | \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace | 
|  | \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller | 
|  | %% than skip between lines in the table. | 
|  | \fi} | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{conditionals,} | 
|  | % Prevent errors for section commands. | 
|  | % Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals. | 
|  | \def\ignoresections{% | 
|  | \let\chapter=\relax | 
|  | \let\unnumbered=\relax | 
|  | \let\top=\relax | 
|  | \let\unnumberedsec=\relax | 
|  | \let\unnumberedsection=\relax | 
|  | \let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax | 
|  | \let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax | 
|  | \let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax | 
|  | \let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax | 
|  | \let\section=\relax | 
|  | \let\subsec=\relax | 
|  | \let\subsubsec=\relax | 
|  | \let\subsection=\relax | 
|  | \let\subsubsection=\relax | 
|  | \let\appendix=\relax | 
|  | \let\appendixsec=\relax | 
|  | \let\appendixsection=\relax | 
|  | \let\appendixsubsec=\relax | 
|  | \let\appendixsubsection=\relax | 
|  | \let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax | 
|  | \let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax | 
|  | \let\contents=\relax | 
|  | \let\smallbook=\relax | 
|  | \let\titlepage=\relax | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source | 
|  | % and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used | 
|  | % incorrectly. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\ignoremorecommands{% | 
|  | \let\defcodeindex = \relax | 
|  | \let\defcv = \relax | 
|  | \let\deffn = \relax | 
|  | \let\deffnx = \relax | 
|  | \let\defindex = \relax | 
|  | \let\defivar = \relax | 
|  | \let\defmac = \relax | 
|  | \let\defmethod = \relax | 
|  | \let\defop = \relax | 
|  | \let\defopt = \relax | 
|  | \let\defspec = \relax | 
|  | \let\deftp = \relax | 
|  | \let\deftypefn = \relax | 
|  | \let\deftypefun = \relax | 
|  | \let\deftypeivar = \relax | 
|  | \let\deftypeop = \relax | 
|  | \let\deftypevar = \relax | 
|  | \let\deftypevr = \relax | 
|  | \let\defun = \relax | 
|  | \let\defvar = \relax | 
|  | \let\defvr = \relax | 
|  | \let\ref = \relax | 
|  | \let\xref = \relax | 
|  | \let\printindex = \relax | 
|  | \let\pxref = \relax | 
|  | \let\settitle = \relax | 
|  | \let\setchapternewpage = \relax | 
|  | \let\setchapterstyle = \relax | 
|  | \let\everyheading = \relax | 
|  | \let\evenheading = \relax | 
|  | \let\oddheading = \relax | 
|  | \let\everyfooting = \relax | 
|  | \let\evenfooting = \relax | 
|  | \let\oddfooting = \relax | 
|  | \let\headings = \relax | 
|  | \let\include = \relax | 
|  | \let\lowersections = \relax | 
|  | \let\down = \relax | 
|  | \let\raisesections = \relax | 
|  | \let\up = \relax | 
|  | \let\set = \relax | 
|  | \let\clear = \relax | 
|  | \let\item = \relax | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Ignore @ignore ... @end ignore. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Ignore @ifinfo, @ifhtml, @ifnottex, @html, @menu, and @direntry text. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} | 
|  | \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} | 
|  | \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} | 
|  | \def\html{\doignore{html}} | 
|  | \def\menu{\doignore{menu}} | 
|  | \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file | 
|  | % which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX. | 
|  | \let\dircategory = \comment | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Ignore text until a line `@end #1'. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\doignore#1{\begingroup | 
|  | % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer. | 
|  | \ignoresections | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'. | 
|  | % This @ is a catcode 12 token (that is the normal catcode of @ in | 
|  | % this texinfo.tex file).  We change the catcode of @ below to match. | 
|  | \long\def\doignoretext##1@end #1{\enddoignore}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. | 
|  | \catcode32 = 10 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble. | 
|  | \catcode`\{ = 9 | 
|  | \catcode`\} = 9 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % We must not have @c interpreted as a control sequence. | 
|  | \catcode`\@ = 12 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Make the letter c a comment character so that the rest of the line | 
|  | % will be ignored. This way, the document can have (for example) | 
|  | %   @c @end ifinfo | 
|  | % and the @end ifinfo will be properly ignored. | 
|  | % (We've just changed @ to catcode 12.) | 
|  | \catcode`\c = 14 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % And now expand that command. | 
|  | \doignoretext | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % What we do to finish off ignored text. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse | 
|  | \def\obstexwarn{% | 
|  | \ifwarnedobs\relax\else | 
|  | % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0. | 
|  | % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines. | 
|  | \immediate\write16{} | 
|  | \immediate\write16{WARNING: for users of Unix TeX 3.0!} | 
|  | \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).} | 
|  | \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.} | 
|  | \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.} | 
|  | \immediate\write16{  Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.} | 
|  | \immediate\write16{  (See ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/TeX.README.)} | 
|  | \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the} | 
|  | \immediate\write16{  script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution} | 
|  | \immediate\write16{  to use a workaround.} | 
|  | \immediate\write16{} | 
|  | \global\warnedobstrue | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex.  For a | 
|  | % workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed), | 
|  | % uncomment the following line: | 
|  | %%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for | 
|  | % purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\nestedignore#1{% | 
|  | \obstexwarn | 
|  | % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end | 
|  | % command, so that nested ignore constructs work.  Thus, we put the | 
|  | % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result.  To minimize | 
|  | % the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on | 
|  | % page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup | 
|  | % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer. | 
|  | \ignoresections | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the | 
|  | % @end command again. | 
|  | \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands.  Most cause no | 
|  | % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do | 
|  | % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we | 
|  | % undefine them. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately; | 
|  | % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors. | 
|  | \ignoremorecommands | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define | 
|  | % all the font commands to also use \nullfont.  We don't use | 
|  | % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites | 
|  | % might have that installed.  Therefore, math mode will still | 
|  | % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of | 
|  | % stuff compared to the main input. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \nullfont | 
|  | \let\tenrm=\nullfont \let\tenit=\nullfont \let\tensl=\nullfont | 
|  | \let\tenbf=\nullfont \let\tentt=\nullfont \let\smallcaps=\nullfont | 
|  | \let\tensf=\nullfont | 
|  | % Similarly for index fonts (mostly for their use in smallexample). | 
|  | \let\smallrm=\nullfont \let\smallit=\nullfont \let\smallsl=\nullfont | 
|  | \let\smallbf=\nullfont \let\smalltt=\nullfont \let\smallsc=\nullfont | 
|  | \let\smallsf=\nullfont | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts. | 
|  | \tracinglostchars = 0 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Don't bother to do space factor calculations. | 
|  | \frenchspacing | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Don't report underfull hboxes. | 
|  | \hbadness = 10000 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Do minimal line-breaking. | 
|  | \pretolerance = 10000 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Do not execute instructions in @tex | 
|  | \def\tex{\doignore{tex}}% | 
|  | % Do not execute macro definitions. | 
|  | % `c' is a comment character, so the word `macro' will get cut off. | 
|  | \def\macro{\doignore{ma}}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. | 
|  | % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be | 
|  | % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our | 
|  | % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we | 
|  | % didn't need it.  Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid | 
|  | % losing inside @example, for instance. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10 | 
|  | \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR. | 
|  | \parsearg\setxxx} | 
|  | \def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} | 
|  | \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% | 
|  | \def\temp{#2}% | 
|  | \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty | 
|  | \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | } | 
|  | % Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or | 
|  | % \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into | 
|  | % an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'. | 
|  | \def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx} | 
|  | \def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. | 
|  | { | 
|  | \catcode`\_ = \active | 
|  | % | 
|  | % We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if | 
|  | % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}.  So \let any | 
|  | % such active characters to their normal equivalents. | 
|  | \gdef\value{\begingroup | 
|  | \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 | 
|  | \indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore | 
|  | \valuexxx} | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's | 
|  | % properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies).  Ones | 
|  | % whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything | 
|  | % about that.  The command has to be fully expandable, since the result | 
|  | % winds up in the index file.  This means that if the variable's value | 
|  | % contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain it will fail | 
|  | % (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work to do a | 
|  | % one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\expandablevalue#1{% | 
|  | \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax | 
|  | {[No value for ``#1'']}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \csname SET#1\endcsname | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined | 
|  | % with @set. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx} | 
|  | \def\ifsetxxx #1{% | 
|  | \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax | 
|  | \expandafter\ifsetfail | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \expandafter\ifsetsucceed | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}} | 
|  | \def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}} | 
|  | \defineunmatchedend{ifset} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been | 
|  | % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx} | 
|  | \def\ifclearxxx #1{% | 
|  | \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax | 
|  | \expandafter\ifclearsucceed | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \expandafter\ifclearfail | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}} | 
|  | \def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}} | 
|  | \defineunmatchedend{ifclear} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo always succeed; we read the text | 
|  | % following, through the first @end iftex (etc.).  Make `@end iftex' | 
|  | % (etc.) valid only after an @iftex. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}} | 
|  | \def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}} | 
|  | \def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}} | 
|  | \defineunmatchedend{iftex} | 
|  | \defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml} | 
|  | \defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (for example) and end it | 
|  | % at @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no | 
|  | % effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group).  So we must | 
|  | % define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value.  (We can't | 
|  | % just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since | 
|  | % the @ifset might be nested.) | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\conditionalsucceed#1{% | 
|  | \edef\temp{% | 
|  | % Remember the current value of \E#1. | 
|  | \let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value. | 
|  | \def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \temp | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the | 
|  | % control sequences after we've constructed them. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @defininfoenclose. | 
|  | \let\definfoenclose=\comment | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{indexing,} | 
|  | % Index generation facilities | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite | 
|  | % except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex. | 
|  | {\catcode`\@=11 | 
|  | \gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. | 
|  | % It automatically defines \fooindex such that | 
|  | % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. | 
|  | % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for | 
|  | % the file that accumulates this index.  The file's extension is foo. | 
|  | % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long | 
|  | % for the sake of vms. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\newindex#1{% | 
|  | \iflinks | 
|  | \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname | 
|  | \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define @#1index | 
|  | \noexpand\doindex{#1}} | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @defindex foo  ==  \newindex{foo} | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\newcodeindex#1{% | 
|  | \iflinks | 
|  | \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname | 
|  | \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% | 
|  | \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @synindex foo bar    makes index foo feed into index bar. | 
|  | % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % @syncodeindex foo bar   similar, but put all entries made for index foo | 
|  | % inside @code. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} | 
|  | \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), | 
|  | % #3 the target index (bar). | 
|  | \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% | 
|  | % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up | 
|  | % closing the target index. | 
|  | \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined | 
|  | % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the | 
|  | % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files. | 
|  | \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname | 
|  | \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1 | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % redefine \fooindfile: | 
|  | \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname | 
|  | \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp | 
|  | % redefine \fooindex: | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. | 
|  | % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, | 
|  | %  and it is "foo", the name of the index. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work. | 
|  | % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} | 
|  | % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} | 
|  | \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. | 
|  | \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} | 
|  | \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\indexdummies{% | 
|  | \def\ { }% | 
|  | % Take care of the plain tex accent commands. | 
|  | \def\"{\realbackslash "}% | 
|  | \def\`{\realbackslash `}% | 
|  | \def\'{\realbackslash '}% | 
|  | \def\^{\realbackslash ^}% | 
|  | \def\~{\realbackslash ~}% | 
|  | \def\={\realbackslash =}% | 
|  | \def\b{\realbackslash b}% | 
|  | \def\c{\realbackslash c}% | 
|  | \def\d{\realbackslash d}% | 
|  | \def\u{\realbackslash u}% | 
|  | \def\v{\realbackslash v}% | 
|  | \def\H{\realbackslash H}% | 
|  | % Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters. | 
|  | \def\oe{\realbackslash oe}% | 
|  | \def\ae{\realbackslash ae}% | 
|  | \def\aa{\realbackslash aa}% | 
|  | \def\OE{\realbackslash OE}% | 
|  | \def\AE{\realbackslash AE}% | 
|  | \def\AA{\realbackslash AA}% | 
|  | \def\o{\realbackslash o}% | 
|  | \def\O{\realbackslash O}% | 
|  | \def\l{\realbackslash l}% | 
|  | \def\L{\realbackslash L}% | 
|  | \def\ss{\realbackslash ss}% | 
|  | % Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry. | 
|  | % (Must be a way to avoid doing expansion at all, and thus not have to | 
|  | % laboriously list every single command here.) | 
|  | \def\@{@}% will be @@ when we switch to @ as escape char. | 
|  | % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again. | 
|  | % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes | 
|  | % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. | 
|  | \let\{ = \mylbrace | 
|  | \let\} = \myrbrace | 
|  | \def\_{{\realbackslash _}}% | 
|  | \def\w{\realbackslash w }% | 
|  | \def\bf{\realbackslash bf }% | 
|  | %\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }% | 
|  | \def\sl{\realbackslash sl }% | 
|  | \def\sf{\realbackslash sf}% | 
|  | \def\tt{\realbackslash tt}% | 
|  | \def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}% | 
|  | \def\less{\realbackslash less}% | 
|  | \def\hat{\realbackslash hat}% | 
|  | \def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}% | 
|  | \def\dots{\realbackslash dots }% | 
|  | \def\result{\realbackslash result}% | 
|  | \def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}% | 
|  | \def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}% | 
|  | \def\print{\realbackslash print}% | 
|  | \def\error{\realbackslash error}% | 
|  | \def\point{\realbackslash point}% | 
|  | \def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}% | 
|  | \def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}% | 
|  | \def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}% | 
|  | \def\uref##1{\realbackslash uref {##1}}% | 
|  | \def\url##1{\realbackslash url {##1}}% | 
|  | \def\env##1{\realbackslash env {##1}}% | 
|  | \def\command##1{\realbackslash command {##1}}% | 
|  | \def\option##1{\realbackslash option {##1}}% | 
|  | \def\dotless##1{\realbackslash dotless {##1}}% | 
|  | \def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}% | 
|  | \def\,##1{\realbackslash ,{##1}}% | 
|  | \def\t##1{\realbackslash t {##1}}% | 
|  | \def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}% | 
|  | \def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}% | 
|  | \def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}% | 
|  | \def\sc##1{\realbackslash sc {##1}}% | 
|  | \def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}% | 
|  | \def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}% | 
|  | \def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}% | 
|  | \def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}% | 
|  | \def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}% | 
|  | \def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}% | 
|  | \def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}% | 
|  | \def\acronym##1{\realbackslash acronym {##1}}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not | 
|  | % contain - or _, and the value does not contain any | 
|  | % (non-fully-expandable) commands. | 
|  | \let\value = \expandablevalue | 
|  | % | 
|  | \unsepspaces | 
|  | % Turn off macro expansion | 
|  | \turnoffmacros | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces | 
|  | % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the | 
|  | % expansion of \tie (\\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). | 
|  | {\obeyspaces | 
|  | \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands. | 
|  | % This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by. | 
|  | \def\indexdummyfont#1{#1} | 
|  | \def\indexdummytex{TeX} | 
|  | \def\indexdummydots{...} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\indexnofonts{% | 
|  | % Just ignore accents. | 
|  | \let\,=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\"=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\`=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\'=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\^=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\~=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\==\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\b=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\c=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\d=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\u=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\v=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\H=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\dotless=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | % Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters. | 
|  | \def\oe{oe}% | 
|  | \def\ae{ae}% | 
|  | \def\aa{aa}% | 
|  | \def\OE{OE}% | 
|  | \def\AE{AE}% | 
|  | \def\AA{AA}% | 
|  | \def\o{o}% | 
|  | \def\O{O}% | 
|  | \def\l{l}% | 
|  | \def\L{L}% | 
|  | \def\ss{ss}% | 
|  | \let\w=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\t=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\r=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\i=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\b=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\emph=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\strong=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\cite=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\sc=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | %Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command | 
|  | % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |... | 
|  | %\let\tt=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\tclose=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\code=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\url=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\uref=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\env=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\acronym=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\command=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\option=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\file=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\samp=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\kbd=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\key=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\var=\indexdummyfont | 
|  | \let\TeX=\indexdummytex | 
|  | \let\dots=\indexdummydots | 
|  | \def\@{@}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape. | 
|  | % We must first make another character (@) an escape | 
|  | % so we do not become unable to do a definition. | 
|  |  | 
|  | {\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other | 
|  | @gdef@realbackslash{\}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex. | 
|  | \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? | 
|  |  | 
|  | % For \ifx comparisons. | 
|  | \def\emptymacro{\empty} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Workhorse for all \fooindexes. | 
|  | % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- | 
|  | % \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are.  The main exception | 
|  | % is with defuns, which call us directly. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\dosubind#1#2#3{% | 
|  | % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. | 
|  | \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else | 
|  | \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | {% | 
|  | \count255=\lastpenalty | 
|  | {% | 
|  | \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage | 
|  | \escapechar=`\\ | 
|  | {% | 
|  | \let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio. | 
|  | \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now | 
|  | % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\thirdarg{#3}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key. | 
|  | \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro | 
|  | \let\subentry = \empty | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \def\subentry{ #3}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % First process the index entry with all font commands turned | 
|  | % off to get the string to sort by. | 
|  | {\indexnofonts \xdef\indexsorttmp{#2\subentry}}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Now the real index entry with the fonts. | 
|  | \toks0 = {#2}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index | 
|  | % string.  And include a space. | 
|  | \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else | 
|  | \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key | 
|  | % and the original text, including any font commands.  We write | 
|  | % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file, texindex reduces to | 
|  | % two when writing the .??s sorted result. | 
|  | \edef\temp{% | 
|  | \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{% | 
|  | \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it | 
|  | % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting | 
|  | % the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the | 
|  | % \write will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that sequences | 
|  | % like this: | 
|  | % @end defun | 
|  | % @tindex whatever | 
|  | % @defun ... | 
|  | % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the | 
|  | % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of | 
|  | % the previous defun. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We | 
|  | % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \iflinks | 
|  | \ifvmode | 
|  | \skip0 = \lastskip | 
|  | \ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\lastskip \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \temp % do the write | 
|  | % | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | }% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \penalty\count255 | 
|  | }% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % The index entry written in the file actually looks like | 
|  | %  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} | 
|  | % or | 
|  | %  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} | 
|  | % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files | 
|  | % containing these kinds of lines: | 
|  | %  \initial {c} | 
|  | %     before the first topic whose initial is c | 
|  | %  \entry {topic}{pagelist} | 
|  | %     for a topic that is used without subtopics | 
|  | %  \primary {topic} | 
|  | %     for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics | 
|  | %  \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} | 
|  | %     for each subtopic. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define the user-accessible indexing commands | 
|  | % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\findex {\fnindex} | 
|  | \def\kindex {\kyindex} | 
|  | \def\cindex {\cpindex} | 
|  | \def\vindex {\vrindex} | 
|  | \def\tindex {\tpindex} | 
|  | \def\pindex {\pgindex} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} | 
|  | {\obeylines % | 
|  | \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % | 
|  | \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. | 
|  | % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex} | 
|  | \def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup | 
|  | \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \smallfonts \rm | 
|  | \tolerance = 9500 | 
|  | \indexbreaks | 
|  | % | 
|  | % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. | 
|  | % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains | 
|  | % \initial {@} | 
|  | % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces | 
|  | % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). | 
|  | \catcode`\@ = 11 | 
|  | \openin 1 \jobname.#1s | 
|  | \ifeof 1 | 
|  | % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, | 
|  | % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the | 
|  | % index.  The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure | 
|  | % there is some text. | 
|  | \putwordIndexNonexistent | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof | 
|  | % false.  We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so | 
|  | % it can discover if there is anything in it. | 
|  | \read 1 to \temp | 
|  | \ifeof 1 | 
|  | \putwordIndexIsEmpty | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape | 
|  | % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change | 
|  | % to make right now. | 
|  | \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}% | 
|  | \catcode`\\ = 0 | 
|  | \escapechar = `\\ | 
|  | \begindoublecolumns | 
|  | \input \jobname.#1s | 
|  | \enddoublecolumns | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \closein 1 | 
|  | \endgroup} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. | 
|  | % Change them to control the appearance of the index. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\initial#1{{% | 
|  | % Some minor font changes for the special characters. | 
|  | \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. | 
|  | \removelastskip | 
|  | % | 
|  | % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. | 
|  | \penalty -300 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of | 
|  | % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column | 
|  | % to column.  It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch | 
|  | % we need before each entry, but it's better. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. | 
|  | \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip | 
|  | \leftline{\secbf #1}% | 
|  | \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Do our best not to break after the initial. | 
|  | \nobreak | 
|  | }} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2 | 
|  | % flush to the right margin.  It is used for index and table of contents | 
|  | % entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\entry#1#2{\begingroup | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't | 
|  | % affect previous text. | 
|  | \par | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Do not fill out the last line with white space. | 
|  | \parfillskip = 0in | 
|  | % | 
|  | % No extra space above this paragraph. | 
|  | \parskip = 0in | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. | 
|  | \finalhyphendemerits = 0 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number | 
|  | % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the | 
|  | % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large | 
|  | % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across | 
|  | % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start | 
|  | % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. | 
|  | \hangindent = 2em | 
|  | % | 
|  | % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line | 
|  | % with blank space. | 
|  | \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil | 
|  | % | 
|  | % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns. | 
|  | \vskip 0pt plus1pt | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking | 
|  | % parameters we've set above will have an effect. | 
|  | \noindent | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Insert the text of the index entry.  TeX will do line-breaking on it. | 
|  | #1% | 
|  | % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if | 
|  | % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be | 
|  | % cursed by a Unix daemon. | 
|  | \def\tempa{{\rm }}% | 
|  | \def\tempb{#2}% | 
|  | \edef\tempc{\tempa}% | 
|  | \edef\tempd{\tempb}% | 
|  | \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out | 
|  | % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the | 
|  | % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.) | 
|  | \hfil\penalty50 | 
|  | \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as | 
|  | % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull | 
|  | % \hbox ensues. | 
|  | \ifpdf | 
|  | \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph. | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi% | 
|  | \par | 
|  | \endgroup} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em. | 
|  | \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders | 
|  | \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\secondary #1#2{ | 
|  | {\parfillskip=0in \parskip=0in | 
|  | \hangindent =1in \hangafter=1 | 
|  | \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill #2\par | 
|  | }} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. | 
|  | % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, | 
|  | % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. | 
|  | \catcode`\@=11 | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newbox\partialpage | 
|  | \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns | 
|  | % Grab any single-column material above us. | 
|  | \output = {% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a | 
|  | % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output | 
|  | % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is | 
|  | % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off).  In | 
|  | % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal | 
|  | % output routine.  Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this | 
|  | % runs and this will be a no-op.  See the indexspread.tex test case. | 
|  | \ifvoid\partialpage \else | 
|  | \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% | 
|  | % Unvbox the main output page. | 
|  | \unvbox\PAGE | 
|  | \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip | 
|  | }% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. | 
|  | \output = {\doublecolumnout}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Change the page size parameters.  We could do this once outside this | 
|  | % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 | 
|  | % format, but then we repeat the same computation.  Repeating a couple | 
|  | % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the | 
|  | % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between | 
|  | % the columns.  We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it | 
|  | % changes automatically with the paper format.  The magic constant | 
|  | % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) | 
|  | % as it did when we hard-coded it. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we | 
|  | % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) | 
|  | % been clobbered. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize | 
|  | \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize | 
|  | \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 | 
|  | \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Double the \vsize as well.  (We don't need a separate register here, | 
|  | % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) | 
|  | \vsize = 2\vsize | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except | 
|  | % the last. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\doublecolumnout{% | 
|  | \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth | 
|  | % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal | 
|  | % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the | 
|  | % previous page. | 
|  | \dimen@ = \vsize | 
|  | \divide\dimen@ by 2 | 
|  | \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage | 
|  | % | 
|  | % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. | 
|  | \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ | 
|  | \onepageout\pagesofar | 
|  | \unvbox255 | 
|  | \penalty\outputpenalty | 
|  | } | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, | 
|  | % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. | 
|  | \def\pagesofar{% | 
|  | \unvbox\partialpage | 
|  | % | 
|  | \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize | 
|  | \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize | 
|  | \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% | 
|  | } | 
|  | % | 
|  | % All done with double columns. | 
|  | \def\enddoublecolumns{% | 
|  | \output = {% | 
|  | % Split the last of the double-column material.  Leave it on the | 
|  | % current page, no automatic page break. | 
|  | \balancecolumns | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page, | 
|  | % though, there will be another page break right after this \output | 
|  | % invocation ends.  Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not | 
|  | % want to call it again.  Therefore, reset \output to its normal | 
|  | % definition right away.  (We hope \balancecolumns will never be | 
|  | % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes | 
|  | % the output somewhat more palatable.) | 
|  | \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \eject | 
|  | \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns | 
|  | % | 
|  | % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted | 
|  | % the current page.  We're now back to normal single-column | 
|  | % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the | 
|  | % \endgroup where \vsize got restored). | 
|  | \pagegoal = \vsize | 
|  | } | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Called at the end of the double column material. | 
|  | \def\balancecolumns{% | 
|  | \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. | 
|  | \dimen@ = \ht0 | 
|  | \advance\dimen@ by \topskip | 
|  | \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip | 
|  | \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to | 
|  | %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}% | 
|  | \splittopskip = \topskip | 
|  | % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. | 
|  | {% | 
|  | \vbadness = 10000 | 
|  | \loop | 
|  | \global\setbox3 = \copy0 | 
|  | \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ | 
|  | \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ | 
|  | \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt | 
|  | \repeat | 
|  | }% | 
|  | %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}% | 
|  | \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% | 
|  | \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \pagesofar | 
|  | } | 
|  | \catcode`\@ = \other | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{sectioning,} | 
|  | % Chapters, sections, etc. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newcount\chapno | 
|  | \newcount\secno        \secno=0 | 
|  | \newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0 | 
|  | \newcount\subsubsecno  \subsubsecno=0 | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... | 
|  | \newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@ | 
|  | % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} | 
|  | % We do the following for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual | 
|  | % letter in the expansion, not just typeset. | 
|  | \def\appendixletter{% | 
|  | \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% | 
|  | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% | 
|  | % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is | 
|  | % expanded while writing the .toc file.  \char\appendixno is not | 
|  | % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out | 
|  | % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. | 
|  | \else\char\the\appendixno | 
|  | \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi | 
|  | \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter. | 
|  | % page headings and footings can use it.  @section does likewise. | 
|  | \def\thischapter{} | 
|  | \def\thissection{} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level | 
|  | \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. | 
|  | \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} | 
|  | \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. | 
|  | \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} | 
|  | \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Choose a numbered-heading macro | 
|  | % #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections | 
|  | % #2 is text for heading | 
|  | \def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1 | 
|  | \ifcase\absseclevel | 
|  | \chapterzzz{#2} | 
|  | \or | 
|  | \seczzz{#2} | 
|  | \or | 
|  | \numberedsubseczzz{#2} | 
|  | \or | 
|  | \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2} | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \ifnum \absseclevel<0 | 
|  | \chapterzzz{#2} | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2} | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels | 
|  | \def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1 | 
|  | \ifcase\absseclevel | 
|  | \appendixzzz{#2} | 
|  | \or | 
|  | \appendixsectionzzz{#2} | 
|  | \or | 
|  | \appendixsubseczzz{#2} | 
|  | \or | 
|  | \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2} | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \ifnum \absseclevel<0 | 
|  | \appendixzzz{#2} | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2} | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels | 
|  | \def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1 | 
|  | \ifcase\absseclevel | 
|  | \unnumberedzzz{#2} | 
|  | \or | 
|  | \unnumberedseczzz{#2} | 
|  | \or | 
|  | \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2} | 
|  | \or | 
|  | \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2} | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \ifnum \absseclevel<0 | 
|  | \unnumberedzzz{#2} | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2} | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. | 
|  | \def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title} | 
|  | \outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy} | 
|  | \def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz | 
|  | \def\chapterzzz #1{% | 
|  | \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 | 
|  | \global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}% | 
|  | \chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}% | 
|  | \gdef\thissection{#1}% | 
|  | \gdef\thischaptername{#1}% | 
|  | % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter | 
|  | % because we don't want its macros evaluated now. | 
|  | \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}% | 
|  | \toks0 = {#1}% | 
|  | \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}% | 
|  | {\the\chapno}}}% | 
|  | \temp | 
|  | \donoderef | 
|  | \global\let\section = \numberedsec | 
|  | \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec | 
|  | \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy} | 
|  | \def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz | 
|  | \def\appendixzzz #1{% | 
|  | \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 | 
|  | \global\advance \appendixno by 1 | 
|  | \message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}% | 
|  | \chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}% | 
|  | \gdef\thissection{#1}% | 
|  | \gdef\thischaptername{#1}% | 
|  | \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}% | 
|  | \toks0 = {#1}% | 
|  | \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}% | 
|  | {\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}}}% | 
|  | \temp | 
|  | \appendixnoderef | 
|  | \global\let\section = \appendixsec | 
|  | \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec | 
|  | \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. | 
|  | \outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy} | 
|  | \def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @top is like @unnumbered. | 
|  | \outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy} | 
|  | \def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz | 
|  | \def\unnumberedzzz #1{% | 
|  | \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the | 
|  | % argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX | 
|  | % expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX | 
|  | % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant | 
|  | % to be executed, not expanded). | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear | 
|  | % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use | 
|  | % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, | 
|  | % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for | 
|  | % the toc entries.) | 
|  | \toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \unnumbchapmacro {#1}% | 
|  | \gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% | 
|  | \toks0 = {#1}% | 
|  | \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry{\the\toks0}}}% | 
|  | \temp | 
|  | \unnumbnoderef | 
|  | \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec | 
|  | \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec | 
|  | \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Sections. | 
|  | \outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy} | 
|  | \def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz | 
|  | \def\seczzz #1{% | 
|  | \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 % | 
|  | \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}% | 
|  | \toks0 = {#1}% | 
|  | \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}% | 
|  | {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}% | 
|  | \temp | 
|  | \donoderef | 
|  | \nobreak | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy} | 
|  | \outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy} | 
|  | \def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz | 
|  | \def\appendixsectionzzz #1{% | 
|  | \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 % | 
|  | \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}% | 
|  | \toks0 = {#1}% | 
|  | \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}% | 
|  | {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}}% | 
|  | \temp | 
|  | \appendixnoderef | 
|  | \nobreak | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy} | 
|  | \def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz | 
|  | \def\unnumberedseczzz #1{% | 
|  | \plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% | 
|  | \toks0 = {#1}% | 
|  | \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry{\the\toks0}}}% | 
|  | \temp | 
|  | \unnumbnoderef | 
|  | \nobreak | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Subsections. | 
|  | \outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy} | 
|  | \def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz | 
|  | \def\numberedsubseczzz #1{% | 
|  | \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 % | 
|  | \subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}% | 
|  | \toks0 = {#1}% | 
|  | \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}% | 
|  | {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}% | 
|  | \temp | 
|  | \donoderef | 
|  | \nobreak | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy} | 
|  | \def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz | 
|  | \def\appendixsubseczzz #1{% | 
|  | \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 % | 
|  | \subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}% | 
|  | \toks0 = {#1}% | 
|  | \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}% | 
|  | {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}% | 
|  | \temp | 
|  | \appendixnoderef | 
|  | \nobreak | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy} | 
|  | \def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz | 
|  | \def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{% | 
|  | \plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% | 
|  | \toks0 = {#1}% | 
|  | \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry% | 
|  | {\the\toks0}}}% | 
|  | \temp | 
|  | \unnumbnoderef | 
|  | \nobreak | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Subsubsections. | 
|  | \outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy} | 
|  | \def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz | 
|  | \def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{% | 
|  | \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 % | 
|  | \subsubsecheading {#1} | 
|  | {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}% | 
|  | \toks0 = {#1}% | 
|  | \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}% | 
|  | {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}% | 
|  | \temp | 
|  | \donoderef | 
|  | \nobreak | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy} | 
|  | \def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz | 
|  | \def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{% | 
|  | \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 % | 
|  | \subsubsecheading {#1} | 
|  | {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}% | 
|  | \toks0 = {#1}% | 
|  | \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}% | 
|  | {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}% | 
|  | \temp | 
|  | \appendixnoderef | 
|  | \nobreak | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy} | 
|  | \def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz | 
|  | \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{% | 
|  | \plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% | 
|  | \toks0 = {#1}% | 
|  | \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry% | 
|  | {\the\toks0}}}% | 
|  | \temp | 
|  | \unnumbnoderef | 
|  | \nobreak | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo. | 
|  | % Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work. | 
|  | \def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz} | 
|  | \def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz} | 
|  | \def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz} | 
|  | \def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz} | 
|  | \def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz} | 
|  | \def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz} | 
|  | \def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz} | 
|  | \def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz} | 
|  | \def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz} | 
|  | \def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz} | 
|  | \def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % These macros control what the section commands do, according | 
|  | % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). | 
|  | % Define them by default for a numbered chapter. | 
|  | \global\let\section = \numberedsec | 
|  | \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec | 
|  | \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading | 
|  |  | 
|  | % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such: | 
|  | %       1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit | 
|  | %          overlong headings to fold. | 
|  | %       2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a | 
|  | %          heading is obnoxious; this forbids it. | 
|  | %       3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and | 
|  | %          if justification is not attempted.  Hence \raggedright. | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz} | 
|  | \def\majorheadingzzz #1{% | 
|  | {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% | 
|  | {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | 
|  | \parindent=0pt\raggedright | 
|  | \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz} | 
|  | \def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak % | 
|  | {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | 
|  | \parindent=0pt\raggedright | 
|  | \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. | 
|  | \def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading} | 
|  | \def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading} | 
|  | \def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only | 
|  | % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), | 
|  | % given all the information in convenient, parsed form. | 
|  |  | 
|  | %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) | 
|  | \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} | 
|  |  | 
|  | %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it | 
|  | % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newskip\chapheadingskip | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} | 
|  | \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} | 
|  | \def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\CHAPPAGoff{% | 
|  | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | 
|  | \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak | 
|  | \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\CHAPPAGon{% | 
|  | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | 
|  | \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager | 
|  | \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager | 
|  | \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\CHAPPAGodd{ | 
|  | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage | 
|  | \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage | 
|  | \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage | 
|  | \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \CHAPPAGon | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\CHAPFplain{ | 
|  | \global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain | 
|  | \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain | 
|  | \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Plain chapter opening. | 
|  | % #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered. | 
|  | \def\chfplain#1#2{% | 
|  | \pchapsepmacro | 
|  | {% | 
|  | \chapfonts \rm | 
|  | \def\chapnum{#2}% | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}% | 
|  | \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright | 
|  | \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe | 
|  | \unhbox0 #1\par}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title | 
|  | \nobreak | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Plain opening for unnumbered. | 
|  | \def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. | 
|  | \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax | 
|  | \def\centerchfplain#1{{% | 
|  | \def\centerparametersmaybe{% | 
|  | \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip | 
|  | \leftskip = \rightskip | 
|  | \parfillskip = 0pt | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \chfplain{#1}{}% | 
|  | }} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \CHAPFplain % The default | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\unnchfopen #1{% | 
|  | \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | 
|  | \parindent=0pt\raggedright | 
|  | \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts | 
|  | \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% | 
|  | \par\penalty 5000 % | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\centerchfopen #1{% | 
|  | \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | 
|  | \parindent=0pt | 
|  | \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\CHAPFopen{ | 
|  | \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen | 
|  | \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen | 
|  | \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen} | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Section titles. | 
|  | \newskip\secheadingskip | 
|  | \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}} | 
|  | \def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}} | 
|  | \def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Subsection titles. | 
|  | \newskip \subsecheadingskip | 
|  | \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}} | 
|  | \def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}} | 
|  | \def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Subsubsection titles. | 
|  | \let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip | 
|  | \let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak | 
|  | \def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}} | 
|  | \def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}} | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Print any size section title. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section | 
|  | % number (maybe empty), #3 the text. | 
|  | \def\sectionheading#1#2#3{% | 
|  | {% | 
|  | \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip | 
|  | \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname | 
|  | }% | 
|  | {% | 
|  | % Switch to the right set of fonts. | 
|  | \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number. | 
|  | \def\secnum{#2}% | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright | 
|  | \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number | 
|  | \unhbox0 #3}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | \ifdim\parskip<10pt \nobreak\kern10pt\nobreak\kern-\parskip\fi \nobreak | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{toc,} | 
|  | % Table of contents. | 
|  | \newwrite\tocfile | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. | 
|  | % Called from @chapter, etc.  We supply {\folio} at the end of the | 
|  | % argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % We open the .toc file here instead of at @setfilename or any other | 
|  | % given time so that @contents can be put in the document anywhere. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newif\iftocfileopened | 
|  | \def\writetocentry#1{% | 
|  | \iftocfileopened\else | 
|  | \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc | 
|  | \global\tocfileopenedtrue | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \iflinks \write\tocfile{#1{\folio}}\fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in | 
|  | \newcount\savepageno | 
|  | \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written | 
|  | % to \tocfile. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\startcontents#1{% | 
|  | % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should | 
|  | % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain | 
|  | % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. | 
|  | % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se> | 
|  | \contentsalignmacro | 
|  | \immediate\closeout\tocfile | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. | 
|  | % It is abundantly clear what they are. | 
|  | \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}% | 
|  | \savepageno = \pageno | 
|  | \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly. | 
|  | \catcode`\\=0  \catcode`\{=1  \catcode`\}=2  \catcode`\@=11 | 
|  | % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section | 
|  | % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation.  --karl, 9jul97. | 
|  | %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi | 
|  | \raggedbottom             % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. | 
|  | \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Roman numerals for page numbers. | 
|  | \ifnum \pageno>0 \pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Normal (long) toc. | 
|  | \def\contents{% | 
|  | \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% | 
|  | \openin 1 \jobname.toc | 
|  | \ifeof 1 \else | 
|  | \closein 1 | 
|  | \input \jobname.toc | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \vfill \eject | 
|  | \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect | 
|  | \pdfmakeoutlines | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | \lastnegativepageno = \pageno | 
|  | \pageno = \savepageno | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % And just the chapters. | 
|  | \def\summarycontents{% | 
|  | \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry | 
|  | \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry | 
|  | % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. | 
|  | \secfonts | 
|  | \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl | 
|  | \rm | 
|  | \hyphenpenalty = 10000 | 
|  | \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. | 
|  | \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{} | 
|  | \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{} | 
|  | \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{} | 
|  | \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{} | 
|  | \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{} | 
|  | \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{} | 
|  | \openin 1 \jobname.toc | 
|  | \ifeof 1 \else | 
|  | \closein 1 | 
|  | \input \jobname.toc | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \vfill \eject | 
|  | \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | \lastnegativepageno = \pageno | 
|  | \pageno = \savepageno | 
|  | } | 
|  | \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents | 
|  |  | 
|  | \ifpdf | 
|  | \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  |  | 
|  | % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. | 
|  | % The first argument is the chapter or section name. | 
|  | % The last argument is the page number. | 
|  | % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Chapter-level things, for both the long and short contents. | 
|  | \def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings | 
|  | \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{% | 
|  | \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. | 
|  | % The arg is, e.g. `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. | 
|  | % We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry | 
|  | % command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry | 
|  | % for both, but it doesn't seem worth it. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newdimen\shortappendixwidth | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\shortchaplabel#1{% | 
|  | % Compute width of word "Appendix", may change with language. | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{\shortcontrm \putwordAppendix}% | 
|  | \shortappendixwidth = \wd0 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % We typeset #1 in a box of constant width, regardless of the text of | 
|  | % #1, so the chapter titles will come out aligned. | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{#1}% | 
|  | \dimen0 = \ifdim\wd0 > \shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth \else 0pt \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % This space should be plenty, since a single number is .5em, and the | 
|  | % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. | 
|  | % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after | 
|  | % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) | 
|  | \advance\dimen0 by 1.1em | 
|  | \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hfil}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}} | 
|  | \def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#2\egroup}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Sections. | 
|  | \def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}} | 
|  | \def\unnumbsecentry#1#2{\dosecentry{#1}{#2}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Subsections. | 
|  | \def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}} | 
|  | \def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#2}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % And subsubsections. | 
|  | \def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{% | 
|  | \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}} | 
|  | \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#2}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. | 
|  | \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the | 
|  | % page number. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters | 
|  | % if at all possible; hence the \penalty. | 
|  | \def\dochapentry#1#2{% | 
|  | \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \chapentryfonts | 
|  | \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup | 
|  | \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent | 
|  | \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | 
|  | \endgroup} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup | 
|  | \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent | 
|  | \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | 
|  | \endgroup} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup | 
|  | \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent | 
|  | \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | 
|  | \endgroup} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for | 
|  | % the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here.  (We | 
|  | % can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist | 
|  | % of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.) | 
|  | \def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup | 
|  | \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks | 
|  | % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments.  Since the toc is | 
|  | % typeset in cmr, so characters such as _ would come out wrong; we | 
|  | % have to do the usual translation tricks. | 
|  | \entry{#1}{#2}% | 
|  | \endgroup} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. | 
|  | \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} | 
|  | \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} | 
|  | \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} | 
|  | \let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts | 
|  | \let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{environments,} | 
|  | % @foo ... @end foo. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of | 
|  | % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. | 
|  | % Furthermore, these definitions must come after we define our fonts. | 
|  | \newbox\dblarrowbox    \newbox\longdblarrowbox | 
|  | \newbox\pushcharbox    \newbox\bullbox | 
|  | \newbox\equivbox       \newbox\errorbox | 
|  |  | 
|  | %{\tentt | 
|  | %\global\setbox\dblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil} | 
|  | %\global\setbox\longdblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil} | 
|  | %\global\setbox\pushcharbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil} | 
|  | %\global\setbox\equivbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil} | 
|  | % Adapted from the manmac format (p.420 of TeXbook) | 
|  | %\global\setbox\bullbox = \hbox to 1em{\kern.15em\vrule height .75ex width .85ex | 
|  | %                                      depth .1ex\hfil} | 
|  | %} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. | 
|  | \def\point{$\star$} | 
|  | \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} | 
|  | \def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} | 
|  | \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} | 
|  | \def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. | 
|  | {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. | 
|  | \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules | 
|  | % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil | 
|  | \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. | 
|  | \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. | 
|  | \vbox{ | 
|  | \hrule height\dimen2 | 
|  | \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text. | 
|  | \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. | 
|  | \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. | 
|  | \hrule height\dimen2} | 
|  | \hfil} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % The @error{} command. | 
|  | \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw Tex temporarily. | 
|  | % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. | 
|  | % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\tex{\begingroup | 
|  | \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 | 
|  | \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 | 
|  | \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie | 
|  | \catcode `\%=14 | 
|  | \catcode 43=12 % plus | 
|  | \catcode`\"=12 | 
|  | \catcode`\==12 | 
|  | \catcode`\|=12 | 
|  | \catcode`\<=12 | 
|  | \catcode`\>=12 | 
|  | \escapechar=`\\ | 
|  | % | 
|  | \let\b=\ptexb | 
|  | \let\bullet=\ptexbullet | 
|  | \let\c=\ptexc | 
|  | \let\,=\ptexcomma | 
|  | \let\.=\ptexdot | 
|  | \let\dots=\ptexdots | 
|  | \let\equiv=\ptexequiv | 
|  | \let\!=\ptexexclam | 
|  | \let\i=\ptexi | 
|  | \let\{=\ptexlbrace | 
|  | \let\+=\tabalign | 
|  | \let\}=\ptexrbrace | 
|  | \let\*=\ptexstar | 
|  | \let\t=\ptext | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% | 
|  | \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% | 
|  | \def\@{@}% | 
|  | \let\Etex=\endgroup} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define @lisp ... @endlisp. | 
|  | % @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things, | 
|  | % including the definition of @endlisp (which normally is erroneous). | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. | 
|  | \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other | 
|  | % such environments.  \null is better than a space, since it doesn't | 
|  | % have any width. | 
|  | \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword | 
|  | % space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this | 
|  | % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input | 
|  | % should produce a line of output anyway. | 
|  | % | 
|  | {\obeyspaces % | 
|  | \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is.  This is | 
|  | % for use in \parsearg. | 
|  | {\sepspaces% | 
|  | \global\let\obeyedspace= } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This space is always present above and below environments. | 
|  | \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical.  We use \parskip here | 
|  | % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip | 
|  | % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the | 
|  | % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\aboveenvbreak{{\advance\envskipamount by \parskip | 
|  | \endgraf \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount | 
|  | \removelastskip \penalty-50 \vskip\envskipamount \fi}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins. | 
|  | \let\nonarrowing=\relax | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around | 
|  | % environment contents. | 
|  | \font\circle=lcircle10 | 
|  | \newdimen\circthick | 
|  | \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner | 
|  | \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip | 
|  | \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth | 
|  | \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} | 
|  | \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} | 
|  | \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} | 
|  | \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip | 
|  | \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr | 
|  | \hskip\rskip}} | 
|  | \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip | 
|  | \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr | 
|  | \hskip\rskip}} | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip | 
|  |  | 
|  | \long\def\cartouche{% | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip | 
|  | \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*. | 
|  | \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip | 
|  | \advance\cartinner by-\rskip | 
|  | \cartouter=\hsize | 
|  | \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either | 
|  | %                                    side, and for 6pt waste from | 
|  | %                                    each corner char, and rule thickness | 
|  | \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip | 
|  | % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. | 
|  | \let\nonarrowing=\comment | 
|  | \vbox\bgroup | 
|  | \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt | 
|  | \carttop | 
|  | \hbox\bgroup | 
|  | \hskip\lskip | 
|  | \vrule\kern3pt | 
|  | \vbox\bgroup | 
|  | \hsize=\cartinner | 
|  | \kern3pt | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \baselineskip=\normbskip | 
|  | \lineskip=\normlskip | 
|  | \parskip=\normpskip | 
|  | \vskip -\parskip | 
|  | \def\Ecartouche{% | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | \kern3pt | 
|  | \egroup | 
|  | \kern3pt\vrule | 
|  | \hskip\rskip | 
|  | \egroup | 
|  | \cartbot | 
|  | \egroup | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | }} | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, | 
|  | % inside a group. | 
|  | \def\nonfillstart{% | 
|  | \aboveenvbreak | 
|  | \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body | 
|  | \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy | 
|  | \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. | 
|  | \singlespace | 
|  | \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines | 
|  | \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output | 
|  | \parskip = 0pt | 
|  | \parindent = 0pt | 
|  | \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes | 
|  | % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing | 
|  | % at next level down. | 
|  | \ifx\nonarrowing\relax | 
|  | \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing | 
|  | \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing | 
|  | \let\exdent=\nofillexdent | 
|  | \let\nonarrowing=\relax | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular | 
|  | % environment, so the error checking in \end will work. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via | 
|  | % \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group.  That way we keep | 
|  | % the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be | 
|  | % inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after | 
|  | % the environment. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font. | 
|  | \def\lisp{\begingroup | 
|  | \nonfillstart | 
|  | \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish | 
|  | \tt | 
|  | \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. | 
|  | \gobble       % eat return | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @example: Same as @lisp. | 
|  | \def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @small... is usually equivalent to the non-small (@smallbook | 
|  | % redefines).  We must call \example (or whatever) last in the | 
|  | % definition, since it reads the return following the @example (or | 
|  | % whatever) command. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % This actually allows (for example) @end display inside an | 
|  | % @smalldisplay.  Too bad, but makeinfo will catch the error anyway. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\smalldisplay{\begingroup\def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\display} | 
|  | \def\smallexample{\begingroup\def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} | 
|  | \def\smallformat{\begingroup\def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format} | 
|  | \def\smalllisp{\begingroup\def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Real @smallexample and @smalllisp (when @smallbook): use smaller fonts. | 
|  | % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. | 
|  | \def\smalllispx{\begingroup | 
|  | \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}% | 
|  | \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}% | 
|  | \smallfonts | 
|  | \lisp | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @display: same as @lisp except keep current font. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\display{\begingroup | 
|  | \nonfillstart | 
|  | \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish | 
|  | \gobble | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @smalldisplay (when @smallbook): @display plus smaller fonts. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\smalldisplayx{\begingroup | 
|  | \def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}% | 
|  | \smallfonts \rm | 
|  | \display | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\format{\begingroup | 
|  | \let\nonarrowing = t | 
|  | \nonfillstart | 
|  | \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish | 
|  | \gobble | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @smallformat (when @smallbook): @format plus smaller fonts. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\smallformatx{\begingroup | 
|  | \def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}% | 
|  | \smallfonts \rm | 
|  | \format | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @flushleft (same as @format). | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @flushright. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\flushright{\begingroup | 
|  | \let\nonarrowing = t | 
|  | \nonfillstart | 
|  | \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish | 
|  | \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill | 
|  | \gobble | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) | 
|  | % and narrows the margins. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\quotation{% | 
|  | \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body | 
|  | {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip | 
|  | \singlespace | 
|  | \parindent=0pt | 
|  | % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're | 
|  | % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment... | 
|  | \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. | 
|  | \ifx\nonarrowing\relax | 
|  | \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing | 
|  | \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing | 
|  | \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing | 
|  | \let\nonarrowing = \relax | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} | 
|  | % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, | 
|  | % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: | 
|  | % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command.  --janneke@gnu.org | 
|  | % | 
|  | % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996.  The TeXbook. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % [Knuth] p. 344; only we need to do '@' too | 
|  | \def\dospecials{% | 
|  | \do\ \do\\\do\@\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% | 
|  | \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~} | 
|  | % | 
|  | % [Knuth] p. 380 | 
|  | \def\uncatcodespecials{% | 
|  | \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=12}\dospecials} | 
|  | % | 
|  | % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 | 
|  | % Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq} | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Setup for the @verb command. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Eight spaces for a tab | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \catcode`\^^I=\active | 
|  | \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\setupverb{% | 
|  | \tt  % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim | 
|  | \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% | 
|  | \catcode`\`=\active | 
|  | \tabeightspaces | 
|  | % Respect line breaks, | 
|  | % print special symbols as themselves, and | 
|  | % make each space count | 
|  | % must do in this order: | 
|  | \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Setup for the @verbatim environment | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Real tab expansion | 
|  | \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup} | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \catcode`\^^I=\active | 
|  | \gdef\tabexpand{% | 
|  | \catcode`\^^I=\active | 
|  | \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup | 
|  | \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab | 
|  | \divide\dimen0 by\tabw | 
|  | \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw | 
|  | \advance\dimen0 by\tabw  % advance to next multiple of \tabw | 
|  | \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox | 
|  | }% | 
|  | } | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | \def\setupverbatim{% | 
|  | % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim | 
|  | \tt | 
|  | \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}% | 
|  | \catcode`\`=\active | 
|  | \tabexpand | 
|  | % Respect line breaks, | 
|  | % print special symbols as themselves, and | 
|  | % make each space count | 
|  | % must do in this order: | 
|  | \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces | 
|  | \everypar{\starttabbox}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique | 
|  | % delimiter characters.  Before first delimiter expect a | 
|  | % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: | 
|  | % | 
|  | %    \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} | 
|  | % | 
|  | % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12 | 
|  | \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} | 
|  | % | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that | 
|  | % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: | 
|  | % | 
|  | %     \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} | 
|  | % | 
|  | % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, | 
|  | % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': | 
|  | % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}' | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] | 
|  | %% Include LaTeX hack for completeness -- never know | 
|  | %% \begingroup | 
|  | %% \catcode`|=0 \catcode`[=1 | 
|  | %% \catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12\catcode`\ =\active | 
|  | %% \catcode`\\=12|gdef|doverbatim#1@end verbatim[ | 
|  | %% #1|endgroup|def|Everbatim[]|end[verbatim]] | 
|  | %% |endgroup | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \catcode`\ =\active | 
|  | \gdef\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1\end{verbatim}} | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\verbatim{% | 
|  | \def\Everbatim{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}% | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \nonfillstart | 
|  | \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent | 
|  | \begingroup\setupverbatim\doverbatim | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name). | 
|  | \def\verbatiminclude{% | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \catcode`\\=12 | 
|  | \catcode`~=12 | 
|  | \catcode`^=12 | 
|  | \catcode`_=12 | 
|  | \catcode`|=12 | 
|  | \catcode`<=12 | 
|  | \catcode`>=12 | 
|  | \catcode`+=12 | 
|  | \parsearg\doverbatiminclude | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\setupverbatiminclude{% | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \nonfillstart | 
|  | \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent | 
|  | \begingroup\setupverbatim | 
|  | } | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\doverbatiminclude#1{% | 
|  | % Restore active chars for included file. | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \def\thisfile{#1}% | 
|  | \expandafter\expandafter\setupverbatiminclude\input\thisfile | 
|  | \endgroup\nonfillfinish\endgroup | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{defuns,} | 
|  | % @defun etc. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally | 
|  | \def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in | 
|  | \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt | 
|  | \newskip\deftypemargin \deftypemargin=12pt | 
|  | \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newcount\parencount | 
|  | % define \functionparens, which makes ( and ) and & do special things. | 
|  | % \functionparens affects the group it is contained in. | 
|  | \def\activeparens{% | 
|  | \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\&=\active | 
|  | \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. | 
|  | \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) | 
|  |  | 
|  | {\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm) | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example, | 
|  | % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, | 
|  | % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. | 
|  | \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen | 
|  | \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack | 
|  |  | 
|  | \gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 } | 
|  | \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} | 
|  | % This is used to turn on special parens | 
|  | % but make & act ordinary (given that it's active). | 
|  | \gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions. | 
|  | % This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses. | 
|  | \gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested | 
|  | \global\advance\parencount by 1 | 
|  | } | 
|  | % | 
|  | % This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens. | 
|  | \gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 } | 
|  | % | 
|  | \gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0. | 
|  | % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (. | 
|  | \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi | 
|  | \global\advance \parencount by -1 } | 
|  | % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards | 
|  | \gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ } | 
|  | % | 
|  | \gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr} | 
|  | } % End of definition inside \activeparens | 
|  | %% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the | 
|  | %% contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ] | 
|  | \def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 } | 
|  | \def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 } | 
|  | \let\ampnr = \& | 
|  | \def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}} | 
|  | \def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Active &'s sneak into the index arguments, so make sure it's defined. | 
|  | { | 
|  | \catcode`& = 13 | 
|  | \global\let& = \ampnr | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % First, defname, which formats the header line itself. | 
|  | % #1 should be the function name. | 
|  | % #2 should be the type of definition, such as "Function". | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\defname #1#2{% | 
|  | % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were | 
|  | % outside the @def... | 
|  | \dimen2=\leftskip | 
|  | \advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent | 
|  | \noindent | 
|  | \setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}% | 
|  | \dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line | 
|  | \dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations | 
|  | \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1 | 
|  | % Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such) | 
|  | % ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin, | 
|  | % but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking | 
|  | {% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins, | 
|  | % so that \rightline will obey them. | 
|  | \advance \hsize by -\dimen2 | 
|  | \rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip -1.25pc }}}% | 
|  | % Make all lines underfull and no complaints: | 
|  | \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 | 
|  | \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent | 
|  | \exdentamount=\defbodyindent | 
|  | {\df #1}\enskip        % Generate function name | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Actually process the body of a definition | 
|  | % #1 should be the terminating control sequence, such as \Edefun. | 
|  | % #2 should be the "another name" control sequence, such as \defunx. | 
|  | % #3 should be the control sequence that actually processes the header, | 
|  | %    such as \defunheader. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\defparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody | 
|  | \medbreak % | 
|  | % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies | 
|  | % so that it will exit this group. | 
|  | \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% | 
|  | \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}% | 
|  | \parindent=0in | 
|  | \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent | 
|  | \exdentamount=\defbodyindent | 
|  | \begingroup % | 
|  | \catcode 61=\active % 61 is `=' | 
|  | \obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define). | 
|  | % #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define). | 
|  | % #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing. | 
|  | % #4, delimited by the space, is the class name. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV % | 
|  | \medbreak % | 
|  | % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies | 
|  | % so that it will exit this group. | 
|  | \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% | 
|  | \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}% | 
|  | \parindent=0in | 
|  | \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent | 
|  | \exdentamount=\defbodyindent | 
|  | \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Used for @deftypemethod and @deftypeivar. | 
|  | % #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define). | 
|  | % #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define). | 
|  | % #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing. | 
|  | % #4, delimited by a space, is the class name. | 
|  | % #5 is the method's return type. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {\begingroup\inENV | 
|  | \medbreak | 
|  | \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% | 
|  | \def#2##1 ##2 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}% | 
|  | \parindent=0in | 
|  | \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent | 
|  | \exdentamount=\defbodyindent | 
|  | \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Used for @deftypeop.  The change from \deftypemethparsebody is an | 
|  | % extra argument at the beginning which is the `category', instead of it | 
|  | % being the hardwired string `Method' or `Instance Variable'.  We have | 
|  | % to account for this both in the \...x definition and in parsing the | 
|  | % input at hand.  Thus also need a control sequence (passed as #5) for | 
|  | % the \E... definition to assign the category name to. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\deftypeopparsebody#1#2#3#4#5 #6 {\begingroup\inENV | 
|  | \medbreak | 
|  | \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% | 
|  | \def#2##1 ##2 ##3 {% | 
|  | \def#4{##1}% | 
|  | \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}{##3}}}% | 
|  | \parindent=0in | 
|  | \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent | 
|  | \exdentamount=\defbodyindent | 
|  | \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}{#6}}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV % | 
|  | \medbreak % | 
|  | % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies | 
|  | % so that it will exit this group. | 
|  | \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% | 
|  | \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}% | 
|  | \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}% | 
|  | \parindent=0in | 
|  | \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent | 
|  | \exdentamount=\defbodyindent | 
|  | \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones | 
|  | % except that they do not make parens into active characters. | 
|  | % These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody | 
|  | \medbreak % | 
|  | % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies | 
|  | % so that it will exit this group. | 
|  | \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% | 
|  | \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}% | 
|  | \parindent=0in | 
|  | \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent | 
|  | \exdentamount=\defbodyindent | 
|  | \begingroup % | 
|  | \catcode 61=\active % | 
|  | \obeylines\spacesplit#3} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody.  It could probably be used for | 
|  | % some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{% | 
|  | \begingroup\inENV % | 
|  | \medbreak % | 
|  | % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies | 
|  | % so that it will exit this group. | 
|  | \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% | 
|  | \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}% | 
|  | \parindent=0in | 
|  | \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent | 
|  | \exdentamount=\defbodyindent | 
|  | \begingroup\obeylines | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {% | 
|  | \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}% | 
|  | \spacesplit{#3{#4}}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the | 
|  | % type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct | 
|  | % termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument.  Sigh. | 
|  | % \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody | 
|  | % | 
|  | % So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name.  That | 
|  | % way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and | 
|  | % won't strip off the braces. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {% | 
|  | \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}% | 
|  | \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the | 
|  | % braces (if any).  That's what this does. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final | 
|  | % thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3 | 
|  | % (which might be empty) the arguments. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{% | 
|  | #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}% | 
|  | }% | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV % | 
|  | \medbreak % | 
|  | % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies | 
|  | % so that it will exit this group. | 
|  | \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% | 
|  | \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}% | 
|  | \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}% | 
|  | \parindent=0in | 
|  | \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent | 
|  | \exdentamount=\defbodyindent | 
|  | \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Split up #2 at the first space token. | 
|  | % call #1 with two arguments: | 
|  | %  the first is all of #2 before the space token, | 
|  | %  the second is all of #2 after that space token. | 
|  | % If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg | 
|  | % and the second is passed as empty. | 
|  |  | 
|  | {\obeylines | 
|  | \gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitfoo{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitfoo}% | 
|  | \long\gdef\spacesplitfoo#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitfoo{% | 
|  | \ifx\relax #3% | 
|  | #1{#2}{}\else #1{#2}{#3#4}\fi}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % So much for the things common to all kinds of definitions. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define @defun. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun | 
|  | % Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\defunargs#1{\functionparens \sl | 
|  | % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars. | 
|  | % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar. | 
|  | % Set the font temporarily and use \font in case \setfont made \tensl a macro. | 
|  | {\tensl\hyphenchar\font=0}% | 
|  | #1% | 
|  | {\tensl\hyphenchar\font=45}% | 
|  | \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi% | 
|  | \interlinepenalty=10000 | 
|  | \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil | 
|  | \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\deftypefunargs #1{% | 
|  | % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars. | 
|  | % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar. | 
|  | % Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special. | 
|  | \boldbraxnoamp | 
|  | \tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars | 
|  | \interlinepenalty=10000 | 
|  | \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil | 
|  | \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @deffn Command forward-char nchars | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% | 
|  | \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup % | 
|  | \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @defun == @deffn Function | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index | 
|  | \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDeffunc}% | 
|  | \defunargs {#2}\endgroup % | 
|  | \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar}) | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name and args. | 
|  | \def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax} | 
|  | % #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args. | 
|  | \def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{% | 
|  | \doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index | 
|  | \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{\putwordDeftypefun}% | 
|  | \deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup % | 
|  | \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar}) | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$ | 
|  | % puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null. | 
|  | \def\defheaderxcond#1#2$$${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % #1 is the classification.  #2 is the data type.  #3 is the name and args. | 
|  | \def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax} | 
|  | % #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args. | 
|  | \def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{% | 
|  | \doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents | 
|  | %               at least some C++ text from working | 
|  | \defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}% | 
|  | \deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup % | 
|  | \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @defmac == @deffn Macro | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index | 
|  | \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefmac}% | 
|  | \defunargs {#2}\endgroup % | 
|  | \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @defspec == @deffn Special Form | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index | 
|  | \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefspec}% | 
|  | \defunargs {#2}\endgroup % | 
|  | \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG... | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}% | 
|  | \defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype} | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\defopheader#1#2#3{% | 
|  | \dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ #1}% Make entry in function index | 
|  | \begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype\ \putwordon\ #1}% | 
|  | \defunargs {#3}\endgroup % | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @deftypeop CATEGORY CLASS TYPE OPERATION ARG... | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\deftypeop #1 {\def\deftypeopcategory{#1}% | 
|  | \deftypeopparsebody\Edeftypeop\deftypeopx\deftypeopheader | 
|  | \deftypeopcategory} | 
|  | % | 
|  | % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the operation name, #4 the args. | 
|  | \def\deftypeopheader#1#2#3#4{% | 
|  | \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3} | 
|  | {\deftypeopcategory\ \putwordon\ \code{#1}}% | 
|  | \deftypefunargs{#4}% | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @deftypemethod CLASS TYPE METHOD ARG... | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\deftypemethod{% | 
|  | \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader} | 
|  | % | 
|  | % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args. | 
|  | \def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{% | 
|  | \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}% | 
|  | \deftypefunargs{#4}% | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @deftypeivar CLASS TYPE VARNAME | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\deftypeivar{% | 
|  | \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypeivar\deftypeivarx\deftypeivarheader} | 
|  | % | 
|  | % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the variable name. | 
|  | \def\deftypeivarheader#1#2#3{% | 
|  | \dosubind{vr}{\code{#3}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in variable index | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3} | 
|  | {\putwordInstanceVariableof\ \code{#1}}% | 
|  | \defvarargs{#3}% | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @defmethod == @defop Method | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader} | 
|  | % | 
|  | % #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args. | 
|  | \def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{% | 
|  | \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}% | 
|  | \defunargs{#3}% | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}% | 
|  | \defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{% | 
|  | \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% Make entry in var index | 
|  | \begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype\ \putwordof\ #1}% | 
|  | \defvarargs {#3}\endgroup % | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @defivar CLASS VARNAME == @defcv {Instance Variable} CLASS VARNAME | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader} | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\defivarheader#1#2#3{% | 
|  | \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% entry in var index | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \defname{#2}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ #1}% | 
|  | \defvarargs{#3}% | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @defvar | 
|  | % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar. | 
|  | % This is actually simple: just print them in roman. | 
|  | % This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up | 
|  | \def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1% | 
|  | \interlinepenalty=10000 | 
|  | \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @defvr Counter foo-count | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}% | 
|  | \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @defvar == @defvr Variable | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index | 
|  | \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefvar}% | 
|  | \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup % | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @defopt == @defvr {User Option} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index | 
|  | \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefopt}% | 
|  | \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup % | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @deftypevar int foobar | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that | 
|  | % is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index. | 
|  | \def\deftypevarheader #1#2{% | 
|  | \dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index | 
|  | \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{\putwordDeftypevar}% | 
|  | \interlinepenalty=10000 | 
|  | \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak | 
|  | \endgroup} | 
|  | \def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax% | 
|  | \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1} | 
|  | \interlinepenalty=10000 | 
|  | \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak | 
|  | \endgroup} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Now define @deftp | 
|  | % Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @deftp Class window height width ... | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}% | 
|  | \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % These definitions are used if you use @defunx (etc.) | 
|  | % anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\defcvx#1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}} | 
|  | \def\deffnx#1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}} | 
|  | \def\defivarx#1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}} | 
|  | \def\defmacx#1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}} | 
|  | \def\defmethodx#1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}} | 
|  | \def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}} | 
|  | \def\defopx#1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}} | 
|  | \def\defspecx#1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}} | 
|  | \def\deftpx#1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}} | 
|  | \def\deftypefnx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}} | 
|  | \def\deftypefunx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}} | 
|  | \def\deftypeivarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeivarx in invalid context}} | 
|  | \def\deftypemethodx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}} | 
|  | \def\deftypeopx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeopx in invalid context}} | 
|  | \def\deftypevarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}} | 
|  | \def\deftypevrx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}} | 
|  | \def\defunx#1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}} | 
|  | \def\defvarx#1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}} | 
|  | \def\defvrx#1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}} | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{macros,} | 
|  | % @macro. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, | 
|  | % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. | 
|  | \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined | 
|  | \newwrite\macscribble | 
|  | \def\scanmacro#1{% | 
|  | \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M | 
|  | % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex | 
|  | \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@ | 
|  | % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline. | 
|  | \toks0={#1\endinput}% | 
|  | \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp | 
|  | \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% | 
|  | \immediate\closeout\macscribble | 
|  | \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces | 
|  | \input \jobname.tmp | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | } | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \def\scanmacro#1{% | 
|  | \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M | 
|  | % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex | 
|  | \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@ | 
|  | \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1\endinput}\endgroup} | 
|  | \fi | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters | 
|  | \newtoks\macname    % Macro name | 
|  | \newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive? | 
|  | \def\macrolist{}    % List of all defined macros in the form | 
|  | % \do\macro1\do\macro2... | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Utility routines. | 
|  | % Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames. | 
|  | \def\cslet#1#2{% | 
|  | \expandafter\expandafter | 
|  | \expandafter\let | 
|  | \expandafter\expandafter | 
|  | \csname#1\endcsname | 
|  | \csname#2\endcsname} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. | 
|  | % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). | 
|  | {\catcode`\@=11 | 
|  | \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} | 
|  | \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} | 
|  | \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} | 
|  | \def\unbrace#1{#1} | 
|  | \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. | 
|  | {\catcode`\^^M=12\catcode`\Q=3% | 
|  | \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% | 
|  | \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% | 
|  | \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where | 
|  | % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active | 
|  | % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is | 
|  | % done by  making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro | 
|  | % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\macrobodyctxt{% | 
|  | \catcode`\~=12 | 
|  | \catcode`\^=12 | 
|  | \catcode`\_=12 | 
|  | \catcode`\|=12 | 
|  | \catcode`\<=12 | 
|  | \catcode`\>=12 | 
|  | \catcode`\+=12 | 
|  | \catcode`\{=12 | 
|  | \catcode`\}=12 | 
|  | \catcode`\@=12 | 
|  | \catcode`\^^M=12 | 
|  | \usembodybackslash} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\macroargctxt{% | 
|  | \catcode`\~=12 | 
|  | \catcode`\^=12 | 
|  | \catcode`\_=12 | 
|  | \catcode`\|=12 | 
|  | \catcode`\<=12 | 
|  | \catcode`\>=12 | 
|  | \catcode`\+=12 | 
|  | \catcode`\@=12 | 
|  | \catcode`\\=12} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. | 
|  | % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N | 
|  | % where N is the macro parameter number. | 
|  | % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so | 
|  | % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. | 
|  |  | 
|  | {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active | 
|  | @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} | 
|  | @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} | 
|  | } | 
|  | \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} | 
|  | \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\macroxxx#1{% | 
|  | \getargs{#1}%           now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist | 
|  | \ifx\argl\empty       % no arguments | 
|  | \paramno=0% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname | 
|  | \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax | 
|  | \else \errmessage{The name \the\macname\space is reserved}\fi | 
|  | \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% | 
|  | \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% | 
|  | % Add the macroname to \macrolist | 
|  | \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}% | 
|  | \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0 | 
|  | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \begingroup \macrobodyctxt | 
|  | \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody | 
|  | \else \expandafter\parsemacbody | 
|  | \fi} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\unmacro{\parsearg\unmacroxxx} | 
|  | \def\unmacroxxx#1{% | 
|  | \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname | 
|  | \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% | 
|  | \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% | 
|  | % Remove the macro name from \macrolist | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \edef\tempa{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}% | 
|  | \def\do##1{% | 
|  | \def\tempb{##1}% | 
|  | \ifx\tempa\tempb | 
|  | % remove this | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \toks0 = \expandafter{\newmacrolist\do}% | 
|  | \edef\newmacrolist{\the\toks0\expandafter\noexpand\tempa}% | 
|  | \fi}% | 
|  | \def\newmacrolist{}% | 
|  | % Execute macro list to define \newmacrolist | 
|  | \macrolist | 
|  | \global\let\macrolist\newmacrolist | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a | 
|  | % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by | 
|  | % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. | 
|  | \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} | 
|  | \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} | 
|  | \def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} | 
|  | \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Parse the optional {params} list.  Set up \paramno and \paramlist | 
|  | % so \defmacro knows what to do.  Define \macarg.blah for each blah | 
|  | % in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list. | 
|  | % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). | 
|  |  | 
|  | % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions. | 
|  | % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX:  let \hash be something | 
|  | % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine | 
|  | % it to # just before using the token list produced. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before | 
|  | % the macro is used. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% | 
|  | \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,} | 
|  | \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% | 
|  | \if#1;\let\next=\relax | 
|  | \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx | 
|  | \advance\paramno by 1% | 
|  | \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname | 
|  | {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% | 
|  | \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% | 
|  | \fi\next} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. | 
|  | % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.) | 
|  |  | 
|  | \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro% | 
|  | {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% | 
|  | \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro% | 
|  | {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and | 
|  | % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments. | 
|  | % Much magic with \expandafter here. | 
|  | % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file | 
|  | % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group. | 
|  | \def\defmacro{% | 
|  | \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars | 
|  | \ifrecursive | 
|  | \ifcase\paramno | 
|  | % 0 | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | 
|  | \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% | 
|  | \or % 1 | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | 
|  | \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | 
|  | \noexpand\braceorline | 
|  | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% | 
|  | \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% | 
|  | \else % many | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | 
|  | \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | 
|  | \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% | 
|  | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% | 
|  | \expandafter\expandafter | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef | 
|  | \expandafter\expandafter | 
|  | \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname | 
|  | \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \ifcase\paramno | 
|  | % 0 | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | 
|  | \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% | 
|  | \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% | 
|  | \or % 1 | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | 
|  | \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | 
|  | \noexpand\braceorline | 
|  | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% | 
|  | \egroup | 
|  | \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% | 
|  | \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% | 
|  | \else % many | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | 
|  | \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | 
|  | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% | 
|  | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% | 
|  | \expandafter\expandafter | 
|  | \expandafter\xdef | 
|  | \expandafter\expandafter | 
|  | \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname | 
|  | \paramlist{% | 
|  | \egroup | 
|  | \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% | 
|  | \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a | 
|  | % {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole | 
|  | % line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence | 
|  | % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg) | 
|  | \def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} | 
|  | \def\braceorlinexxx{% | 
|  | \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else | 
|  | \expandafter\parsearg | 
|  | \fi \next} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % We mant to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not | 
|  | % expanded by \write. | 
|  | \def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}% | 
|  | \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next} | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @alias. | 
|  | % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal | 
|  | % sign.  Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing. | 
|  | \def\alias{\begingroup\obeyspaces\parsearg\aliasxxx} | 
|  | \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} | 
|  | \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{\ignoreactivespaces | 
|  | \edef\next{\global\let\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname=% | 
|  | \expandafter\noexpand\csname#2\endcsname}% | 
|  | \expandafter\endgroup\next} | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{cross references,} | 
|  | % @xref etc. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newwrite\auxfile | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newif\ifhavexrefs    % True if xref values are known. | 
|  | \newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @inforef is relatively simple. | 
|  | \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} | 
|  | \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, | 
|  | node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @node's job is to define \lastnode. | 
|  | \def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz} | 
|  | \def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]} | 
|  | \def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} | 
|  | \let\nwnode=\node | 
|  | \let\lastnode=\relax | 
|  |  | 
|  | % The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these. | 
|  | \def\donoderef{% | 
|  | \ifx\lastnode\relax\else | 
|  | \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}% | 
|  | {Ysectionnumberandtype}% | 
|  | \global\let\lastnode=\relax | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\unnumbnoderef{% | 
|  | \ifx\lastnode\relax\else | 
|  | \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}% | 
|  | \global\let\lastnode=\relax | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\appendixnoderef{% | 
|  | \ifx\lastnode\relax\else | 
|  | \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}% | 
|  | {Yappendixletterandtype}% | 
|  | \global\let\lastnode=\relax | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newcount\savesfregister | 
|  | \gdef\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} | 
|  | \gdef\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} | 
|  | \gdef\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME, namely | 
|  | % NAME-title, NAME-pg, and NAME-SNT.  Called from \foonoderef.  We have | 
|  | % to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section title | 
|  | % aren't expanded.  It would be nicer not to expand the titles in the | 
|  | % first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\setref#1#2{{% | 
|  | \indexdummies | 
|  | \pdfmkdest{#1}% | 
|  | \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}% | 
|  | \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}% | 
|  | \dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}% | 
|  | }} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is | 
|  | % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed | 
|  | % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed | 
|  | % manual.  All but the node name can be omitted. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} | 
|  | \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} | 
|  | \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} | 
|  | \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup | 
|  | \unsepspaces | 
|  | \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% | 
|  | \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}% | 
|  | \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}% | 
|  | \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}% | 
|  | \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt | 
|  | % No printed node name was explicitly given. | 
|  | \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax | 
|  | % Use the node name inside the square brackets. | 
|  | \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside | 
|  | % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it. | 
|  | \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt | 
|  | % It is in another manual, so we don't have it. | 
|  | \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \ifhavexrefs | 
|  | % We know the real title if we have the xref values. | 
|  | \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. | 
|  | \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% | 
|  | \fi% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not | 
|  | % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will | 
|  | % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals | 
|  | % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this | 
|  | % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it | 
|  | % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. | 
|  | \ifpdf | 
|  | \leavevmode | 
|  | \getfilename{#4}% | 
|  | \ifnum\filenamelength>0 | 
|  | \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% | 
|  | goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1@}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% | 
|  | goto name{#1@}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \linkcolor | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt | 
|  | \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the | 
|  | % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand | 
|  | % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of | 
|  | % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the | 
|  | % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. | 
|  | {\normalturnoffactive | 
|  | % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for | 
|  | % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. | 
|  | \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% | 
|  | \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi | 
|  | }% | 
|  | % [mynode], | 
|  | [\printednodename],\space | 
|  | % page 3 | 
|  | \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \endlink | 
|  | \endgroup} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Use \normalturnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore | 
|  | % and backslash work in node names.  (\turnoffactive doesn't do \.) | 
|  | \def\dosetq#1#2{% | 
|  | {\let\folio=0% | 
|  | \normalturnoffactive | 
|  | \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}% | 
|  | \iflinks | 
|  | \next | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | }% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into | 
|  | % CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...} | 
|  | % When the aux file is read, ' is the escape character | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\internalsetq #1#2{'xrdef {#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Things to be expanded by \internalsetq | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\Ypagenumber{\folio} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\Ytitle{\thissection} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\Ynothing{} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\Ysectionnumberandtype{% | 
|  | \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter\xreftie\the\chapno % | 
|  | \else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno % | 
|  | \else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 % | 
|  | \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno % | 
|  | \else % | 
|  | \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno % | 
|  | \fi \fi \fi } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\Yappendixletterandtype{% | 
|  | \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix\xreftie'char\the\appendixno{}% | 
|  | \else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno % | 
|  | \else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 % | 
|  | \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno % | 
|  | \else % | 
|  | \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno % | 
|  | \fi \fi \fi } | 
|  |  | 
|  | \gdef\xreftie{'tie} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error | 
|  | % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined | 
|  | \let\linenumber = \empty % Non-3.0. | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space} | 
|  | \fi | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME. | 
|  | % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \def\refx#1#2{% | 
|  | \expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax | 
|  | % If not defined, say something at least. | 
|  | \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright | 
|  | \iflinks | 
|  | \ifhavexrefs | 
|  | \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \ifwarnedxrefs\else | 
|  | \global\warnedxrefstrue | 
|  | \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % It's defined, so just use it. | 
|  | \csname X#1\endcsname | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | #2% Output the suffix in any case. | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\xrdef#1{\begingroup | 
|  | % Reenable \ as an escape while reading the second argument. | 
|  | \catcode`\\ = 0 | 
|  | \afterassignment\endgroup | 
|  | \expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists. | 
|  | \def\readauxfile{\begingroup | 
|  | \catcode`\^^@=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^A=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^B=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^C=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^D=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^E=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^F=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^G=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^H=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^K=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^L=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^N=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^P=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^Q=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^R=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^S=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^T=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^U=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^V=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^W=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^X=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^Z=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^[=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^\=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^]=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^^=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^^_=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\@=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^=\other | 
|  | % It was suggested to define this as 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. | 
|  | % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't | 
|  | % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore, | 
|  | % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ | 
|  | % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat | 
|  | % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first | 
|  | % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence.  It could | 
|  | % all be worked out, but why?  Either we support ^^ or we don't. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: | 
|  | % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter | 
|  | % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \catcode`\~=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\[=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\]=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\"=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\_=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\|=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\<=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\>=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\$=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\#=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\&=\other | 
|  | \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off | 
|  | % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters | 
|  | {% | 
|  | \count 1=128 | 
|  | \def\loop{% | 
|  | \catcode\count 1=\other | 
|  | \advance\count 1 by 1 | 
|  | \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi | 
|  | }% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | % The aux file uses ' as the escape (for now). | 
|  | % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on | 
|  | % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names. | 
|  | % For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^ | 
|  | % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish, | 
|  | % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in. | 
|  | \catcode`\{=1 | 
|  | \catcode`\}=2 | 
|  | \catcode`\%=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\'=0 | 
|  | \catcode`\\=\other | 
|  | % | 
|  | \openin 1 \jobname.aux | 
|  | \ifeof 1 \else | 
|  | \closein 1 | 
|  | \input \jobname.aux | 
|  | \global\havexrefstrue | 
|  | \global\warnedobstrue | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit. | 
|  | \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux | 
|  | \endgroup} | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Footnotes. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \newcount \footnoteno | 
|  |  | 
|  | % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is | 
|  | % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a | 
|  | % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is | 
|  | % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a | 
|  | % space to prevent strange expansion errors.) | 
|  | \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only. | 
|  | \let\footnotestyle=\comment | 
|  |  | 
|  | \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote | 
|  |  | 
|  | {\catcode `\@=11 | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain. | 
|  | \gdef\footnote{% | 
|  | \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne | 
|  | \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the | 
|  | % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. | 
|  | \let\@sf\empty | 
|  | \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. | 
|  | \unskip | 
|  | \thisfootno\@sf | 
|  | \footnotezzz | 
|  | }% | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the | 
|  | % footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses | 
|  | % \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when | 
|  | % the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \long\gdef\footnotezzz{\insert\footins\bgroup | 
|  | % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the | 
|  | % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. | 
|  | % So reset some parameters. | 
|  | \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty | 
|  | \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes | 
|  | \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox | 
|  | \floatingpenalty\@MM | 
|  | \leftskip\z@skip | 
|  | \rightskip\z@skip | 
|  | \spaceskip\z@skip | 
|  | \xspaceskip\z@skip | 
|  | \parindent\defaultparindent | 
|  | % | 
|  | \smallfonts \rm | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Hang the footnote text off the number. | 
|  | \hang | 
|  | \textindent{\thisfootno}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text.  Since this | 
|  | % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it | 
|  | % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. | 
|  | \footstrut | 
|  | \futurelet\next\fo@t | 
|  | } | 
|  | \def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t | 
|  | \else\let\next\f@t\fi \next} | 
|  | \def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next} | 
|  | \def\f@t#1{#1\@foot} | 
|  | \def\@foot{\strut\par\egroup} | 
|  |  | 
|  | }%end \catcode `\@=11 | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size | 
|  | % correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers | 
|  | % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\lineskipfactor{.08333} | 
|  | \def\strutheightpercent{.70833} | 
|  | \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\setleading#1{% | 
|  | \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax | 
|  | \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip | 
|  | \normalbaselines | 
|  | \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% | 
|  | \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip | 
|  | depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip | 
|  | }% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should | 
|  | % surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the | 
|  | % change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would | 
|  | % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main | 
|  | % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\|{% | 
|  | % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode. | 
|  | \leavevmode | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output. | 
|  | \vadjust{% | 
|  | % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current | 
|  | % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record. | 
|  | \vskip-\baselineskip | 
|  | % | 
|  | % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So | 
|  | % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin. | 
|  | \llap{% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'. | 
|  | \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt | 
|  | % | 
|  | % This is the space between the bar and the text. | 
|  | \hskip 12pt | 
|  | }% | 
|  | }% | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % For a final copy, take out the rectangles | 
|  | % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided | 
|  | % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. | 
|  | % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Check for and read epsf.tex up front.  If we read it only at @image | 
|  | % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get | 
|  | % undone and the next image would fail. | 
|  | \openin 1 = epsf.tex | 
|  | \ifeof 1 \else | 
|  | \closein 1 | 
|  | % Do not bother showing banner with post-v2.7 epsf.tex (available in | 
|  | % doc/epsf.tex until it shows up on ctan). | 
|  | \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% | 
|  | \input epsf.tex | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | % | 
|  | % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. | 
|  | \newif\ifwarnednoepsf | 
|  | \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to | 
|  | work.  It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get | 
|  | it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\image#1{% | 
|  | \ifx\epsfbox\undefined | 
|  | \ifwarnednoepsf \else | 
|  | \errhelp = \noepsfhelp | 
|  | \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% | 
|  | \global\warnednoepsftrue | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \imagexxx #1,,,\finish | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  | % | 
|  | % Arguments to @image: | 
|  | % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. | 
|  | % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. | 
|  | % #4 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff. | 
|  | \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% | 
|  | \ifpdf | 
|  | \centerline{\dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi | 
|  | \begingroup | 
|  | \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example | 
|  | % If the image is by itself, center it. | 
|  | \ifvmode | 
|  | \nobreak\bigskip | 
|  | % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert | 
|  | % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space | 
|  | % above and below. | 
|  | \nobreak\vskip\parskip | 
|  | \nobreak | 
|  | \centerline{\epsfbox{#1.eps}}% | 
|  | \bigbreak | 
|  | \else | 
|  | % In the middle of a paragraph, no extra space. | 
|  | \epsfbox{#1.eps}% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{localization,} | 
|  | % and i18n. | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after | 
|  | % @setfilename.  If done too late, it may not override everything | 
|  | % properly.  Single argument is the language abbreviation. | 
|  | % It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\documentlanguage{\parsearg\dodocumentlanguage} | 
|  | \def\dodocumentlanguage#1{% | 
|  | \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. | 
|  | % Read the file if it exists. | 
|  | \openin 1 txi-#1.tex | 
|  | \ifeof1 | 
|  | \errhelp = \nolanghelp | 
|  | \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% | 
|  | \let\temp = \relax | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \def\temp{\input txi-#1.tex }% | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | \temp | 
|  | \endgroup | 
|  | } | 
|  | \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or | 
|  | is empty.  Maybe you need to install it?  In the current directory | 
|  | should work if nowhere else does.} | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most | 
|  | % likely, but for now just recognize it. | 
|  | \let\documentencoding = \comment | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Page size parameters. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt | 
|  |  | 
|  | \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt | 
|  | \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt | 
|  | \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Prevent underfull vbox error messages. | 
|  | \vbadness = 10000 | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either. | 
|  | \hbadness = 2000 | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans. | 
|  | \widowpenalty=10000 | 
|  | \clubpenalty=10000 | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're | 
|  | % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.  We want the amount of | 
|  | % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on | 
|  | % \hsize.  We call this whenever the paper size is set. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\setemergencystretch{% | 
|  | \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined | 
|  | % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. | 
|  | \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% | 
|  | \else | 
|  | \emergencystretch = .15\hsize | 
|  | \fi | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset; | 
|  | % 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip.  Then whoever calls us can | 
|  | % set \parskip and call \setleading for \baselineskip. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6{% | 
|  | \voffset = #3\relax | 
|  | \topskip = #6\relax | 
|  | \splittopskip = \topskip | 
|  | % | 
|  | \vsize = #1\relax | 
|  | \advance\vsize by \topskip | 
|  | \outervsize = \vsize | 
|  | \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin | 
|  | \pageheight = \vsize | 
|  | % | 
|  | \hsize = #2\relax | 
|  | \outerhsize = \hsize | 
|  | \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in | 
|  | \pagewidth = \hsize | 
|  | % | 
|  | \normaloffset = #4\relax | 
|  | \bindingoffset = #5\relax | 
|  | % | 
|  | \parindent = \defaultparindent | 
|  | \setemergencystretch | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @letterpaper (the default). | 
|  | \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 | 
|  | \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt | 
|  | \setleading{13.2pt}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. | 
|  | \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{36pt}% | 
|  | }} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format. | 
|  | \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 | 
|  | \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt | 
|  | \setleading{12pt}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5.in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{16pt}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \lispnarrowing = 0.3in | 
|  | \tolerance = 700 | 
|  | \hfuzz = 1pt | 
|  | \contentsrightmargin = 0pt | 
|  | \deftypemargin = 0pt | 
|  | \defbodyindent = .5cm | 
|  | % | 
|  | \let\smalldisplay = \smalldisplayx | 
|  | \let\smallexample = \smalllispx | 
|  | \let\smallformat = \smallformatx | 
|  | \let\smalllisp = \smalllispx | 
|  | }} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. | 
|  | \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 | 
|  | \setleading{12pt}% | 
|  | \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt | 
|  | % | 
|  | \internalpagesizes{53\baselineskip}{160mm}{\voffset}{4mm}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \tolerance = 700 | 
|  | \hfuzz = 1pt | 
|  | }} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.  Top margin | 
|  | % 29mm, hence bottom margin 28mm, nominal side margin 3cm. | 
|  | \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 | 
|  | \setleading{13.6pt}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \afourpaper | 
|  | \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}{3.6mm}{3.6mm}{3mm}{7mm}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \globaldefs = 0 | 
|  | }} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format. | 
|  | \def\afourwide{% | 
|  | \afourpaper | 
|  | \internalpagesizes{6.5in}{9.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{7mm}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \globaldefs = 0 | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] | 
|  | % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, | 
|  | % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx} | 
|  | \def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} | 
|  | \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% | 
|  | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi | 
|  | \globaldefs = 1 | 
|  | % | 
|  | \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt | 
|  | \setleading{13.2pt}% | 
|  | % | 
|  | \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}{\voffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}% | 
|  | }} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Set default to letter. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \letterpaper | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | \message{and turning on texinfo input format.} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. | 
|  | \catcode`\"=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\~=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\^=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\_=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\|=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\<=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\>=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\+=\other | 
|  | \catcode`\$=\other | 
|  | \def\normaldoublequote{"} | 
|  | \def\normaltilde{~} | 
|  | \def\normalcaret{^} | 
|  | \def\normalunderscore{_} | 
|  | \def\normalverticalbar{|} | 
|  | \def\normalless{<} | 
|  | \def\normalgreater{>} | 
|  | \def\normalplus{+} | 
|  | \def\normaldollar{$} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont | 
|  | % where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts, | 
|  | % where something hairier probably needs to be done. | 
|  | % | 
|  | % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print | 
|  | % otherwise.  Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero | 
|  | % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all | 
|  | % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. | 
|  | % | 
|  | \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Same as above, but check for italic font.  Actually this also catches | 
|  | % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from | 
|  | % italic fonts.  But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway | 
|  | % this is not a problem. | 
|  | \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Turn off all special characters except @ | 
|  | % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). | 
|  | % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can | 
|  | % use math or other variants that look better in normal text. | 
|  |  | 
|  | \catcode`\"=\active | 
|  | \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} | 
|  | \let"=\activedoublequote | 
|  | \catcode`\~=\active | 
|  | \def~{{\tt\char126}} | 
|  | \chardef\hat=`\^ | 
|  | \catcode`\^=\active | 
|  | \def^{{\tt \hat}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \catcode`\_=\active | 
|  | \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} | 
|  | % Subroutine for the previous macro. | 
|  | \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \catcode`\|=\active | 
|  | \def|{{\tt\char124}} | 
|  | \chardef \less=`\< | 
|  | \catcode`\<=\active | 
|  | \def<{{\tt \less}} | 
|  | \chardef \gtr=`\> | 
|  | \catcode`\>=\active | 
|  | \def>{{\tt \gtr}} | 
|  | \catcode`\+=\active | 
|  | \def+{{\tt \char 43}} | 
|  | \catcode`\$=\active | 
|  | \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar} | 
|  | %\catcode 27=\active | 
|  | %\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time. | 
|  | {\catcode`\==\active | 
|  | \global\def={{\tt \char 61}}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \catcode`+=\active | 
|  | \catcode`\_=\active | 
|  |  | 
|  | % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file | 
|  | % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. | 
|  | % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on. | 
|  | % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file. | 
|  | \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other} | 
|  |  | 
|  | \catcode`\@=0 | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font | 
|  | \global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\ | 
|  | %{\catcode`\\=\other | 
|  | %@gdef@rawbackslashxx{\}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \rawbackslash redefines \ as input to do \rawbackslashxx. | 
|  | {\catcode`\\=\active | 
|  | @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx }} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font. | 
|  | \def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % \catcode 17=0   % Define control-q | 
|  | \catcode`\\=\active | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters | 
|  | % even after parsing them. | 
|  | @def@turnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote | 
|  | @let\=@realbackslash | 
|  | @let~=@normaltilde | 
|  | @let^=@normalcaret | 
|  | @let_=@normalunderscore | 
|  | @let|=@normalverticalbar | 
|  | @let<=@normalless | 
|  | @let>=@normalgreater | 
|  | @let+=@normalplus | 
|  | @let$=@normaldollar} | 
|  |  | 
|  | @def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote | 
|  | @let\=@normalbackslash | 
|  | @let~=@normaltilde | 
|  | @let^=@normalcaret | 
|  | @let_=@normalunderscore | 
|  | @let|=@normalverticalbar | 
|  | @let<=@normalless | 
|  | @let>=@normalgreater | 
|  | @let+=@normalplus | 
|  | @let$=@normaldollar} | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. | 
|  | % This is canceled by @fixbackslash. | 
|  | @otherifyactive | 
|  |  | 
|  | % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. | 
|  | % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing | 
|  | % a backslash. | 
|  | % | 
|  | @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash} | 
|  | @global@let\ = @eatinput | 
|  |  | 
|  | % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then | 
|  | % the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix | 
|  | % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. | 
|  | % Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input | 
|  | % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. | 
|  | % | 
|  | @gdef@fixbackslash{% | 
|  | @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi | 
|  | @catcode`+=@active | 
|  | @catcode`@_=@active | 
|  | } | 
|  |  | 
|  | % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. | 
|  | @escapechar = `@@ | 
|  |  | 
|  | % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. | 
|  | @catcode`@& = @other | 
|  | @catcode`@# = @other | 
|  | @catcode`@% = @other | 
|  |  | 
|  | @c Set initial fonts. | 
|  | @textfonts | 
|  | @rm | 
|  |  | 
|  |  | 
|  | @c Local variables: | 
|  | @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) | 
|  | @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" | 
|  | @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" | 
|  | @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" | 
|  | @c time-stamp-end: "}" | 
|  | @c End: |